Skip to main content

Full text of "The typewriter industry: The impact of a significant technological innovation (thesis)"

See other formats


70-14,276 


ENGLER, George Nichols, 1944- 

THE TYPEWRITER INDUSTRY: THE IMPACT OF A 
SIGNIFICANT TECHNOLOGICAL INNOVATION. 

University of California, Los Angeles, Ph.D., 1969 
Business Administration 


University Microfilms, Inc., Ann Arbor, Michigan 


(o) Copyright by 
George Nichols Englcr 
1970 

4? 





THIS DISSERTATIOH HAS BEEN MICROFILMED EXACTLY AS RECEIVED 



UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA 
Los Angeles 

The Typewriter Industry: The 
Impact of a Significant Technological Innovation 


A dissertation submitted in partial satisfaction of 
•the requirements for the degree Doctor of Philosophy 
in Business Administration 


By 

George Nichols Engler 


Committee In charge: 

Professor J. Fred Weston, Chairman 
Professor Raymond J, Jessen 
Dean Laurence W. Erickson 
Professor Moshe F. Rubinstein 
Professor James M. Warren 


1969 



The dissertation of George Nichols Engler is approved, and it is 



University of California, Los Angeles 

1969 


11 



TABLE OF CONTENTS 


Page 

LIST OF TABLES AND FIGURES vi 

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS ix 

VITA x 

ABSTRACT OF THE DISSERTATION xi 

CHAPTER I INTRODUCTION 1 

A. Purpose of the Study - 1 

B. Organization of the Study 4 

CHAPTER II THE EARLY HISTORY OF THE TYPEWRITER 

INDUSTRY 10 

, A. Early Years 11 

B. The Remington Company: Manufacturing 

In Volume 18 

C. New Entries 26 

D. Proliferation of Entrants 28 

E. Competitive Processes in Operation 30 

CHAPTER III ECONOMIC FRAMEWORK OF THE TYPEWRITER 

INDUSTRY 35 

A. Product Types and Variations 35 

B. Cost and Production Characteristics 40 

C. Market Structure Analysis 46 

D. New Entry Characteristics 57 

E. Profit Performance Overtime 75 

CHAPTER IV MARKETING, DISTRIBUTION AND SERVICE 
ORGANIZATION IN THE TYPEWRITER 
INDUSTRY 83 

A. Reinforcement of Marketing and Service 

Organization 85 

B. Marketing Problems Facing a Foreign 

Manufacturer 90 

C. Changes in the Typewriter Industry 95 

CHAPTER V THE IMPACT OF FOREICN COMPETITION 

ON THE U.S. TYPEWRITER INDUSTRY 100 


111 



A. Brief Resume of Tariff History 100 

B. Trends in World Trade in Typewriters 102 

C. Manufacturing Operations Abroad by 

U.S. Typewriter Companies 108 

D. Cost Comparisons 120 

E. Market Share Considerations 121 

CHAPTER VI THE IMPACT OF THE IBM TYPEWRITER 127 

A. Early History of the Electric 127 

B. Entry of IBM 129 

C. The War Years 1941-1946 “ 130 

D. Advantages of the Electric over the 

Manual Typewriter 133 

E. Specific Advantages to IBM 144 

F. The Development of the Electric 

Portable by SCM 150 

• 

CHAPTER VII HISTORY AND DIVERSIFICATION POLICIES 

OF THE TYPEWRITER COMPANIES 156 

A. History of Firm Disappearance in the 

Typewriter Industry 156 

B. Merger Patterns in the Typewriter 

Industry 159 

C. Financial Terms of the Mergers of the 

Four Major Typewriter Companies 164 

D. Financial History of the Four Major 

Typewriter Companies 176 

E. Profitability Performance of the Major 

Typewriter Companies 186 

F. Diversification Efforts by Typewriter 

Companies 189 

G. Evaluation of Diversification Efforts 

of the Typewriter Companies 192 

Appendix VII-1 201 

Appendix VII-2 203 

CHAPTER VIII THE EDUCATIONAL MARKET FOR TYPEWRITERS 215 

A. Dimensions of the Educational Market 215 

B. Marketing Efforts of the Major Typewriter 

Companies 221 

C. Market Characteristics of the L.A. 

School System 225 


iv 



227 


D. Extent of Electrification in the L.A. 

School System 

CHAPTER IX FUTURE TRENDS IN THE TYPEWRITER 

INDUSTRY 234 

A. Public Policy Guidelines as Related to 

a Competitive Atmosphere 234 

B. Long Term Prospects for the Typewriter 

Industry 243 

CHAPTER X SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS - 248 

BIBLIOGRAPHY 266 

APPENDIX 275 


v 



TABLES AND FIGURES 


TABLE 

TABLE 

TABLE 

TABLE 

TABLE 

TABLE 

TABLE 

TABLE 

TABLE 

TABLE 

TABLE 

TABLE 

TABLE 

TABLE 

TABLE 


Page 

II- l Highlights in the Chronology of 

the Writing Machine 14 

III- l Market Share Relations, Typewriters 50 

III-2 Market Share Relations Over Time 52 

III-3 Market Shares by Segment of the 

Typewriter Industry, 1967 54 

III-4 Over-all Market Share in Typewriter 

Industry, 1967 56 

III-5 Location and Employment at U.S. 

Typewriter Manufacturing Plants 63 

III-6 Profit Rate on Equity (After Income 

Taxes) for the Four Traditional 
Firms in the Typewriter Industry 77 

V-l U.S. Position in World Production 

of Typewriters, 1965-1967 107 

V-2 Pattern of Location of Manufacture 

of Typewriters Abroad 114 

V-3 Ratings of Portable Typewriters, 

1960 116 

V- 4 Ratings of Portable Typewriters, 

1966 118 

VI- 1 Calculations for Replacement 

Decision at 10X Efficiency 140 

VI-2 Calculations for Internal Rate 

of Return 143 

VI- 3 Calculations for Replacement 

Decision at 5X Efficiency 145 

VII- 1 Summary of Appendix 1 and Appendix 2 158 


▼i 



TABLE VII-2 


Merger History CHitline of the 

Five Surviving U.S. Typewriter 

Companies 160 


TABLE VII-3 

TABLE VI1-4 

TABLE VII-5 

TABLE VII-6 

TABLE VII-7 

TABLE VII-8 

TABLE VII-9 
TABLE VIII-1 

TABLE VIII-2 

TABLE VIII-3 

TABLE VIII-4 


Financial Terms of Various SCM 
Mergers 

Financial Terms of Various 
Olivetti-Underwood Mergers 

Financial Terms of various 
Royal Mergers 

Financial Terms of Various Sperry- 
Rand Mergers 

Terms of Purchase for Past 1930 
Mergers 

Profit Rate on Equity (After Income 
Taxes) for the Four Dominant Firms 
in the Typewriter Industry 

Capsule History of SCM Corporation 

Number of School Districts and 
Average Enrollment per District, 
1965-1966 

Public and Private Schools Number 
by Level, 1930-1966 

Distribution of Local School Systems 
and Enrollments, by Enrollment Size 
of System for the U.S. Fall, 1967 

School Enrollment and Expenditure 
by Type of School, 1930-1960 


165 

168 

170 

174 

175 

187 

193 

217 

218 

219 

220 


TABLE VIII-5 Fall Enrollment, by Organization 

Level of School and Control, U.S., 

1955-1975 222 

TABLE VIII-6 Enrollment in Los Angeles School 

System, Spring 1968 226 


vii 



228 


TABLE VIII-7 Number of Typewriters in L.A. 

City School System 

FIGURE III-l Pattern of Typewriter Sales in 

the United States, 1948-1967 37 

FIGURE III-2 Cost and Production Characteristics 

of Typewriters, 1968-1965 42 

FIGURE III-3 Share of Production Data for 

Industries in SIC 357 Category 45 

FIGURE III-4 Graphic Analysis of Economics of 

Scale 59 

FIGURE V-l United States Proportion of 

Typewriter Imports to Exports, 

* 1948-1967 103 

FIGURE VII-1 Sales Patterns of the Four 

Traditional Typewriter Companies 178 

FIGURE VII-2 Total Asset Patterns of the Four 

Traditional Typewriter Companies 180 

FIGURE VII-3 Net Income Patterns of the Four 

Traditional Typewriter Companies 182 

FIGURE VII-4 Net Worth Patterns of the Four 

Traditional Typewriter Companies 183 

FIGURE VII-5 Rate of Return Patterns of the 

Four Traditional Typewriter 
Companies 184 


viii 



ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS 


I wish to express my appreciation to J. Fred Weston, 
Professor of Finance and Business Economics and Chairman 
of my Dissertation Committee for providing valuable guidance. 

I also appreciate the suggestions and criticism made by 
the members of the Committee: Frank Norton,- Associate 
Professor of Business Economics; Raymond Jessen, Professor 
of Statistics; Laurence Erickson, Dean of the School of 
Education; Moshe Rubinstein, Professor of Engineering; and 
James Warren, Assistant Professor of Finance. 

Special appreciation is expressed to David Cole of 
Litton Industries; Stella Willins and Wayne K. Boulton of 
the Royal Typewriter Division of Litton Industries for their 
valuable assistance in providing vital information concerning 
the typewriter industry. 

My appreciation is also extended to Kent Alves for his 
assistance in the collection of data; and to Virginia Elwood, 
Darlene Johnson, Nelli Williams, and Shara Puck for their 
assistance in preparation of the manuscript. 

Finally, special thanks are due my wife, Suzanne, for 
continued words of encouragement during the completion of 
this dissertation. 


lx 



VITA 


September 27, 19IA 
June, 1965 

June, 1966 

1965-1969 

* 1967-1969 

Jfajor Field: 

Studies In Finance 

Studies In Economics 

Studies In Statistics 
Data Processing 


Bora, Los Angeles, California 

B.S., Finance, University of 
Southern California 

M.B.A., University of California 
Los Angeles 

Research Assistant in Finance, 
Graduate School of Business Admini¬ 
stration, University of California 
Los Angeles 

Assistant Professor of Finance, 
School of Business Administration, 
California State College at Long 

Beach 

Lecturer in Statistics, University 
of California, Los Angeles 

Field of Study 

Business Administration 

Professors J. Fred Weston, David 
Eiteman, Eugene F. Brigham, Keith V. 
Smith, and James Holtz 

Professors Armen Alchien, Jack 
Hirshleifer, Michael Intrilj igator, 
Frank E. Horton, and J. Fred Weston 

and ft-ofessors Raymond Jessen, Frank 

Puffer, Rosser T. fielson, and 
George Diehr 


X 



ABSTRACT OF THE DISSERTATION' 


The Typewriter Industry: The Impact of 
a Significant Technological Innovation 

by 

George Hichols Engler 

Doctor of Philosophy in Business Administration 
University of California, Los Angeles, 1 S 69 
Professor J. Fred Veston, Chairman 

The basic purpose of this study is three-fold: ( 1 ) to 
update the picture of the typewriter industry to include 
both pre-electric and electric phases of development, (2) 
to test the relationship between seller concentration and 
excess profit making in the electric typewriter field, and 
( 3 ) to explore the problem of seller concentration and the 
possible existence of barriers to entry in the electric 
typewriter industry. 

The typewriter industry has progressed through three 
distinct market structure phases. In the initial phase the 
industry was characterized by a high degree of competition 
among over one hundred firms. The second phase began 
during the V) 20 's, when four firms finally came to dominate 
tho typewriter market with 80 percent of the total sales 
value of the industry. From this oligopoly structure the 


xi 



industry entered its third phase—that of a partial 

■onopoly—with I3S as the dominant firm in the field. 

In the past, industry studies have shown a 

relationship between hiqh concentration in an industry, the 
extent of various barriers to entry and the degree of 
profits which cay result. As an integral part of this 
research paper, these various hypotheses were tested for 
the typewriter industry—both for the pre-electric and the 
electric era. The analysis revealed that althouqh there is 
a hiqh deqree of concentration among the U.S. domestic 
"producers this did not lead to a condition of excess 
profits. The analysis did reveal, however, that with the 
hiqh deqree of seller concentration in the typewriter 
industry the barriers to entry were of considerable 
magnitude. 

In the analysis, the dominance of IBr. is clearly 
established. At present, IBM has developed a 

technologically superior electric typewriter. Coupled with 
this is the fact that IKK also has a superior marketing and 
distribution system. With the continued shift in consumer 
preference from the manual to the electric typewriter, it 
seems unlikely that IBM's market position will diminish in 
the near future. 

The study qocs on to show that duo to the forces of 
competition—both foreiqn and domestic—the traditional 
typ< triter manufacturers have been absorbed into larqa 


xii 



diversified organizations. 

The course of action open to the major domestic 
typewriter manufactures seems clear. Either they develop 
an electric typewriter that is technologically equal to 
that of IBH and a sore effective marketing and distribution 
system, or they will continue to experience a decreasing 
share of the typewriter market. 

The technological and marketing aspects of the 
typewriter industry have played a vital role throughout the 
pre-electric and electric eras. In order to successfully 
'adapt to the demands of the forthcoming electronic era, the 
typewriter firms of today must develop both technological 
capability and strong marketing and distribution systems. 


xlll 



CHAPTER X 


IHTBOEUCTIOK 


Typewriters were first produced in the United States 
in 1873. By the turn of the century, most of the 
prevailing features of the manual typewriter had been 
introduced. The visible front-strike design was developed 
in the early 1890’s. Shortly thereafter, the initial steps 
in the development of the portable typewriter were taken. 

‘And by the early 1920’s the noiseless typewriter was on the 
■arket. 

The age of the nanual typewriter was characterized by 
prcdominatly mechanical devices. This aqe—sometimes 
referred to as the "pre-electric era"—continued through 
the 1930’s. Product variations were widely imitated. As a 
result, many new entries were made into the industry. With 
the expiration of the basic product patents, product 
differentiation and changes in design were limited to 
special features which helped sell the uachine.lt wasn’t 
until the end of World War II that the impact of tha 
electric typewriter beqan to bo felt. 

A. El*£i:2se of ite Study 

The typewriter industry is vitally important to tha 


1 



United States and, indeed, the rest of the world as well. 
Curinq the last several decades the typewriter has played a 
key role in business, government, and the bone. Today's 
world, with its overwhelming need for rapid communication, 
would be at a serious disadvantage without the use of the 
typewriter to reproduce the huge volune of personal, 
business and governmental documents so necessary in our 
everyday lives. This fact alone would make the typewriter 
industry worthy of consideration. 

However, upon examination of the literature in the 
‘field, one finds that little has actually been published on 
the typewriter industry. The only available analytical 
study of the industry concentrates on the years prior to 
World War IX.* In the post-war period the typewriter 
industry experienced tremendous qrowth, brouqht about 
larqely by the introduction of a significant technological 
innovation—the electric typewriter. To date, there exists 
no sinqle analytical study which encompasses both the 
pre-electric and the electric phases of typewriter 
development. 

During the 1910’s and early 1920’s the market shares 
of the typewriter manufacturers were fluid, but by the 
*id-1920’s evidence indicates that a high level of 
concentration had been achieved by four larqa 
co»panies--Bemington, Royal, Smith-Corona and Underwool.* 
The advent of the electric typewriter brought about 



significant shifts in traditional market concentrations 
which led, in tarn, to realignment of pre-existing 
corporate structures. The result was the virtual 
disappearance of traditional typewriter manufacturers as 
independent entities. 

Economic theory suggests that a high degree of seller 
concentration within an industry is frequently accompanied 
by collusive practices resulting in excessive profits to 
those involved. This study will attempt to formulate and 
test the hypothesis that the typewriter industry since the 
‘■id-1920's has conformed to the conclusions suqqested by 
economic theory regarding the relationship between 
concentration and excess profits. 

Economic theory further suqgests that when seller 
concentration exists, it is also possible that barriers to 
entry will be present. Economics of scale, product 
differentiation, absolute cost advantages, and capital 
requirements are four frequently cited barriers. Evidence 
from the typewriter industry indicates that some of these 
barriers were indeed of considerable importance during the 
pro-electric era. 3 In the following pages an attempt will 
be made to determine if any significant barriers to entry 
exist in the electric era. 

Thus, the basic purpose of this study is three-fold: 

(1) to update the picture of the typewriter industry to 
include both pro-electric and electric phases of 


3 



development, (2) to test the relationship between seller 
concentration and excess profit nakinq in the electric 
typewriter field, and (3) to explore the problem of seller 
concentration and the possible existence of barriers to 
entry in the electric typewriter industry. 

B. Organiz ati on of the Study 

A qeneral historical background of the typewriter 
industry is presented in Chapter II. Starting in the early 
‘1700's the history of the typewriter is developed through 
the 1860's. At this tine the first practical typewriter 
was developed. Fro* this point on, typewriters were 
produced in larqe volume with a qreat number of new entries 
into the industry. The chapter then examines the reasons 
and the events that led to the formation of the aajor 
typewriter manufacturers during the 1920's and 1930's. 

while Chapter II looks at the typewriter industry 
fro* an historical standpoint. Chapter III analyzes the 
industry from an economic point of view. The market 
structure features of the industry are examined to 
determine what kind of structural changes occurred over 
ti*e and to determine the level of concentration within the 
industry. Features of market structure are then compared 
to »arket performance to determine how industry profits 
relate to the level of seller concentration. Associated 



with the level of concentration is the possibility of 
barriers to entry into the market. Four 

barriers—econooics of scale, absolute cost barriers, 
product differentiation and capital requirements—are 
examined to see what relationships exist between barriers 
to entry and the relative deqrea of concentration. 

Chapter IV discusses the marketing and distribution 
systems that the industry requires for an effective sales 
program of typewriters. First the marketing, distribution 
and service organizations of the domestic firms are 
'examined in terms of the success the traditional typewriter 
conpanics are havinq in competing with IBK. Next the 
■arketinq problems of foreign manufacturers are examined. 
The type of distribution system open to foreiqn 
competitors, the dollar size of investment needed to 
siqnificantly penetrate the U.S. market, and the maximum 
market share that can be expected if the foreign producers 
do not penetrate the O.S. market are further topics 
discussed in this chapter. 

Continuing this theme. Chapter V deals with the 
impact of foreiqn competition on the U.S. typewriter 
industry. It begins with a brief resume of the tarift 
history of the industry at homo and abroad. Next the 
trends of imports and exports of typewriters are exanined 
to see how U.S. production and consumption of typewriters 
relate to other countries’ production and consumption of 


3 



typewriters. The factors that influence D.S. companies to 
prepuce typewriters abroad are discussed in terns of their 
impact on the domestic market as well as their impact on 
foreiqn markets. And finally, in light of the increasing 
effects of foreign competition, the new shift in market 
shares of foreiqn companies is considered to see what 
effect these companies will have on the U.S. typewriter 
industry in future years. 

eany of the problems facing the traditional 
typewriter aanufacturers, such as declining or shifting 
‘market shares and increasing foreiqn competition, have 
partially been the result of the significant part that 
electric typewriters play in the typewriter industry today. 
Chapter fl analyzes the impact of the electric typewriter, 
specifically the impact of the IUK electric typewriter, 
upon the entire typewriter market. First the begining of 
the electric era is discussed in terms of how IBH became 
involved in the concept of the electric typewriter while 
other firms ignored it. Next the years of World War II are 
discussed, for during this period IBH achieved its lead in 
the development of the electric typewriter. As seen today, 
the electric typewriter offers considerable advantages over 
the manual typewriter. Each of these advantages is 
discussed with respect to its influence on the overall 
typewriter market. 

The ability of firms to exist in this industry 


6 



depends to a large extent upon the profitability of those 
firms. When they become unprofitable, plaqued with 
production and marketinq problems, they in many cases 
disappear or serqe with another fire. Whether such nerqers 
combined two successful companies or one successful and one 
sick company is the subject matter of Chapter VII. Each of 
the major typewriter companies has had a history of nerqers 
and diversification. First, the story of those firms that 
disappeared is discussed. Then the merqer pattern of those 
firns that still remain is examined in terns of the reasons 
’for the nerqers and the financial terms of the mergers. 
Data on the five larqe typewriter manufacturers were 
collected to analyze the profitability trends within the 
industry. 

Bany of the diversification policies of the 
typewriter companies have been due to the fact that certain 
companies have partially dominated various seqments of the 
typewriter market. One area in which no one typewriter 
manufacturer has made any siqnificant penetration with the 
electric typewriter is that of the educational field. Thus 
Chapter VIII concerns itself with the various aspects of 
tho market for electric typewriters in education. First 
the overall dimensions of the educational field are 
discussed in terms of the size of the national educational 
market. Boxt, the educational marketinq efforts of tha 
major typewriter manufacturers are discussed. Here one 


7 



observes vhat efforts the domestic typewriter producers are 
makinq to sell their products to various school sytems. 
Pron this point on, the focus of the chapter is narrowed to 
an analysis of one specific school system—the Los Angeles 
School System. The size of the system is discussed along 
with the special requirements the systea has in determining 
which typewriters it should buy. And finally, the L.A. 
School System is analyzed with respect to the extent of 
electrification that has occurred in the system and the 
success which various typewriter manufacturers have had in 
'penetration of this field and this school system. 

After analyzinq the past and the present conditions 
in the typewriter industry, the future prospects of the 
industry are examined. Pirst, the immediate future is 
discussed to determine uhat action could be taken to stem 
the increasing dominance by IE.1. Then, the long tern 
prospects of the industry are analyzed. After the electric 
era ends and when the electronic era begins, what kind of 
■achines will be used to replace the typewriter and what 
will be the firm composition of the industry? Perhaps the 
study of past and present trends in the typewriter industry 
will give some indication of what the future may bring. 


8 



FOOTNOTES TO CHAPTER 1 


1. Joe S. Bain, Ea rri ers to Sew C ompet ition 
Bass: Harvard University Press, 1965) p. 89. 


2. Ibid ., pp. 192-195. 

3. Ibid ., p. 285. 


(Cambridge, 


9 



CHAPTER II 


THE EARLY HISTORY OP THE TYPEWRITER INDUSTRY 


Throughout time, mankind has been interested in more 
lasting and simplified forms of communication. This is 
evidenced by rock paintinqs in France during the 

pre-historic period, by the clay tablets of the 
Babylonians, by the parchment paper of the Egyptians, by 

the development of the printinq press and finally by the 
‘advent of the typevriter. 

The early development of the typevriter was quite 
slow and faltering. In 171H, Queen Anne qranted a patent 
to Henry Mill, an Enqlish enqineer, for "an artificial 
nachine ... for the impressing ... of letters singly or 
progressively ... whereby all vritinqs whatsoever may be 
engrossed in paper ... so neat and exact as not to be 
distinguished from print." 1 It is known that Henry Rill vas 
the chief engineer of the Hew Hivcr Company which was one 
of the corporations supplying water to London. In addition 

it is known that he designed the water supply system for 

the town of Northampton. No record is available of what 
type of machine Mill invented, but the basic concept of the 
typewriter is stated in the patent qranted. 


to 



A. Early Years 


The first American patent for a writing machine was 
qranted in 1829 by President Andrew Jaclcson to William 
Austin Burt of Detroit. Burt's aachine used a typewheel as 
a printer. The individual letters were arranqed on the 
typewheel, each desired letter was rotated to the printing 
point, where it was depressed. It is interesting to note 
that Bart was not noted for the development of a typewriter 
but rather for the invention of the solar conpass. His 
‘only aodel of the typewriter was destroyed by fire at the 
Washington Patent Office in 1836. It was restored by the 
same office from a copy of the oriqinal patent and was 
displayed at the Columbian Exposition in 1893. 2 

The first practical typewriter was manufactured in 
1873. But in the forty years intervening between the 
patent to William Burt, a qreat variety of inventor's 
approaches to the typewriter were radc. One such approach 
was made in 1833 when a French patent was granted to Xavier 
Prolean of Marseilles for his machine called the 
"({typographic". It basically "consisted of an assembly of 
type bars arranged in a circle, each type strikinq downward 
upon a couron center." 3 Although it was a sound machine, it 
was too slow for any practical utility and never got off 
the ground. 

Typewriters up to 1923 were divided into two classes 

XI 



based upon their operational characteristics. One was the 
typewbeel nachine based after Willian Burt's nachine -an! 
the second class was the typebar nachine developed after 
Projean's nachine. 

The next najor contributor to the developnent of the 
typewriter was made by Charles Thurber of Worcester, 
Massachusetts on August 26, 1843. On this date he received 
D.S. Patent No. 3228 for a nachine he called the 
Chiroqrapher. It consisted of "a horizontal circular index 
wheel, with vcritcal plungers carrying the characters 
'■ounted round the periphery, rotated into current register 
and depressed to bring the characters down on the paper."* 
This unit was then nounted on a platter that had line and 
letter spacing. The inking mechanism was provided by an 
inked roller. Like others, the nachine worked well, but 
also like the others, it was too slow. 

After 1850, there were numerous inventors working on 
the typewriter. One such inventor was Dr. Sanule W. 
Francis, a New York physician, who in October 1857 secured 
O.S. Patent So. 18,504. In 1863 his final product was 
essentially a snail piano that typed. Its speed was said 
to have exceeded that of the pen, but its large size nade 
it impractical.* 

Sone twenty different inventors in America, Enaland, 
France and Cernany worked on the typewriter between the 
years 1C29-1C73 before the first practical nachine was 


12 



developed. A complete list of these developments is 
provided in Table II-1. 

An article in Scientific American for July 6, 1867, 
carried a description of a "Type Writing Bachine" which an 
Alabama inventor, John Pratt, had exhibited in London. The 
article was read by a Christopher Latham Sholes of 
Hilwaukee, Wisconsin. Sholes had desiqned and built a 
aachine for imprinting individual addresses on newspapers 
to custoners subscribinq by mail. His nackine, operated by 
a treadle, could stamp the papers in the narqin with 
'addresses already set up in type. Sholes had also invented 
a nunberinq or paginq aachine in principle like the 
familiar numbering hand stamp of the present day, with 
types on the peripheries of rotating discs. His heavy and 
fixed piece of machinery numbered efficiently without 
picking up a separate plate of type for each piece to be 
printed.* 

A crude vorkinq model of the typewriter had been 
developed by Sholes with the help of co-workers Carlos 
Glidden, a lawyer, and Samuel K. Soule, a draftsman and 
civil enqineer, and Matthias Schwalback, who had been a 
builder of tower clocks in the Hhine country. Some 25 or 
30 models of Sholes* typewriter were developed before 1873, 
when it was accepted for manufacture. 7 Sholes had a lonq 
experience as a printer. For aid in financing his projects 
and ultimately in producing the projects for manufacture. 


13 



TABLE II-l 


HIGHLIGHTS Iff TES CHRONOLOGY OF THE 
WRITING MACHINE (1714-1938) 


Dote 

Invention and/or 
Develorcent 

Country 

Inventor or 
Manufacturer 

January 7, 1714 

"Writing Machine" 

England 

Henry Mill 

1784 

For embossing 
printed characters 
for the blind 

Prance 

L'Eemlna 

JUly 23, 1829 

"Typographer" 

America 

William A. Burt 

UB33 

Typebars converged 
at center. "Ktyro- 
graphlc machine or 

Pen" 

France 

Xavier ProJean 
(Progln) 

1843 (1849T) 

"Raphigraphe" 

France 

Pierre Foucault 

1843, 1845 

"Patent Printer"; 
"Mechanical Chiro- 
grapiicr", (Chlro- 
graphie); "Writing 
Machine"; platen 

America 

Charles Diurber 

1845 

Connected pencil, 
traces letters 

America 


1850 

Double hand Im¬ 
pression machine 

America 


IB50 

Ho name 

America 

Oliver T. Eddy 

1850 

— 

America 

J.B. Fairbanks 

1852 

"Mechanical Typo¬ 
grapher" 

America 

JJK. Jones 

1854 

Typo graph 

America 

R.S. Thomas 

JUne 24, 1856 

"Printing Instru¬ 
ment for the Blind" 

America 

Alfred E. Beach 







TABUS H-1 (continued) 


Date 

Invention and/or Country 

Develorcent 

Inventor or 
Manufacturer 

1856 

Typei&eel Princi- Aserica 
pie 

J. H. Cooper 

1857 

"Printing Machine"} Aserica 
Tour rows of keys 

In peg fora; inked 
ribbon 

Dr. S. W. Francis 

I 858 (I 85 U 7 ) 

"Improved Kechani- America 
cal Typographer" 

Henry Harger 

X 863 

"Improved Kechani- Anerica 
cal Typographer or 

Printing Apparatus" 

F. A. deMay 

1863 

"Improved Hand Prin-Anerica 
ting Device or Me¬ 
chanical Typogra¬ 
pher 

Benjamin Livermore 

186* 

1866 

Austria 

Mitterhoffer 

Abner Peeler 

"Machine for Anerica 

Writing and Prin¬ 
ting 

1866 

"Pterotype" (first Aserica 
practical type-wheel 
typewriter) 

John Pratt 

1867 

First experimental Anerica 
one-letter yjodel 

C.L. Sholea 

1867 

First working model Anerica 
"Type-writer” 

C.L. Sholea 

1867 

"Machine for Writing - 

-with Type or Printing 
on Paper or other 

Substance" 

Thomas Hall 


13 




TAKES H-l (continued) 


Date 

Invention and/or 
Development 

Country 

Inventor or 
Manufacturer 

1868 

Movable type plate 
and hammer 

America 

— 

Jtrne 23 , 1868 

"Type-writer" 
(capitals only) 

America 

C. L. Sholes 

1870-75 

"Writing Ball" 
example radial- 
strlking-plunger 
class 

England- 

America 

R.J.M. Hansen 

1872 

Spring-seated keys 
carry type 

America 

— 

l 87 h 

First commercial 
typewriter(capitals 
only) 

America 

Remington for 
Sholes and Gliddcn 

I 876 

Remington Ko. 1 
(capitals only) 

America 

Remington 

1878 

Model 2 Remington America 
(capital and small 
letters-first shift) 

Remington 


About 1878 ( 1833 ) "Caligraph"(wrote America Yost-Wagner 

capital and srn.ll 
letters for first 
tine with its first 
keyboard ever made 

1878 Type on ends lever America -—- 


1881 

Elastic type plate 

America —-- 

1884 

Oscillating type 
segment and hammer 

America ——- 

1890 

First portable 

America G. C. Blickensderfer 

1896 

Ford typewriter 

_.... __.... 



TABLE H-l (continued) 


Sate 

Invention and/or 
■ Development 

Country 

Inventor or 
Manufacturer 


1696 

First automatic 
ribbon reverse 

America 

Remington 

September 

1896 

First "noiseless" 

- typewriter 

America 

V.P. Kidder - C. 
C. Colby 


1920 

First standard 
keyboard portable 

America 

Remington 

* 

1924 

noiseless Consoli- America 
dated standard key¬ 
board embodied and 
introduced worldwide 

Remington 


1931 

noiseless portable 

America 

Remington Rand 
(changed in 1927 
Iron Remington) 


1937 

First Ghort stroke 
standard typewriter 

America 

Remington Rand 

December 

1938 

ftodel 17 

America 

Remington Rand 


Adapted froo: Arthur T.. f»utlce. Hr. Typewriter (Boston: Chris¬ 
topher Publishing House, 1961) PP* iOlJ. 


17 



be Has associated with James Densiore. Eensmore bad 
started oat in life as a peddler. But from these travels, 
he Has led into prospecting for oil, as Hell as taking the 
tine to read Ian. In 1848 he passed the Pennsylvania Bar 
examination. Thereafter he became a newspaper editor and 
practiced his law in some individual projects. 

To produce the typewriter, Densnore felt that a 
company with experience in nanufacturing was necessary. He 
proposed to take the typewriter to K. Remington and Son, 
located in Ilion, Mew York, in the Kohawk Valley. 

B. Ihe Remington Com pa ny: Hanufac turi ng in Volum e 

In 1816, a boy named Eliphalet Remington had asked 
his father for a rifle. When his father said he did not 
have the coney to buy one, Eliphalet Remington collected 
some scraps of steel from his father's forge and made his 
own gun.The result was so excellent that his neighbors 
began commissioning him to make rifles for them. 

On August 12, 1861, Eliphalet Remington died of 
appendicitis and his three sons carried on with the work. 
Philo, the oldest, ran the armory and purchasing of raw 
materials. Samuel was the one who had the salesmanship and 
the vision for the future. Eliphalet III, the youngest 
sou, did all of the financial work for the firs.Samuel aril 
Philo were the ones who continued the tradition of 


18 



iaportinq proaisinq inventors. On April 10, 1865 the Civil 
Bar was over and the qovernaent cancelled all or 
Beainqton's aras contracts on April 11th. But the 
Reainqtons had planned well. Only when Saauel died did the 
coapany flounder.® 

In 1864 the Heainqtons had turned a foundry into a 
factory equipped to turn out industrial fara implements and 
other durable qoods. The Reainqtons tried to diversify, 
for they knew the unstable nature of the ailitary arns 
business. However the aqriculture works business dwindled 
*as other factories spranq up in the nidwest. The 
reversible aower they developed lost *350,000. Their 
scatlerqood cottonqin also failed. The horse powered tire 
enqine was profitable for only a short period of time. The 
Beninqton sewinq machine which had SI aillion in capital 
floundered when they hired W.H. Hooper to sell the iten. 
He went berserk and opened offices all over the country 
losinq all of the capital. The Reainqtons personally stood 
behind the $1 aillion loss. 

It was in February 1373 that Harry Harper Benedict of 
the Reainqton Company noticed a typewritten letter in his 
employer's office. He seemed very impressed. Later he and 
Philo cot with Denssora at the Osqood Hotel. Benedict said 
that they "... must on no account let this qct away."* On 
Harch 1, 1873, a contract was siqned with the Reminqtons 

for the manufacture of the typewriter. The Beninqtons felt 


19 



that this machine had the advantages over simple 
handwriting of legibility, rapidity, ease, convenience and 
economy. The fieoinqtons agreed to have their mechanics 
renodel the machine and to manufacture at least 1,000 
units, plus 24,000 at their discretion. 10 However, in 
September 1873 a recession started with the leading banking 
firm of Jay Cooke C Company qoing bankrupt. The winter of 
1873-1874 was worse but in the Sprinq of 1874 Remington 
delivered. Killian K. Jenne of the Remington Coapany 
brouqht out the Remington No. 1 which looked very much like 
*a sewing machine. A firm formed by Densnore and an 
associate, Georqe Washington Newton Yost, whose background 
was similar to Densmore's, was started to market the 
machines. 

Thus, the typewriter industry was on its way. The 
basic keyboard had been established in 1872. In 1878 a 
shift was added in which a lower case was provided for as 
well as an upper case. This was provided by the Remington 
Mo. 2 machine whereas the Herainqton No. 1 could only type 
in capital letters. The shift key was developed by Lucier 
S. Crandel and Byron A. Crooks, both of whoa worked under 
Jenne. In 1893 a front stroke was achieved so that the 
typist could see what was beinq typed without lifting the 
platen. 

The typewriter itself was the result of many 
influences. Efforts in developing a number of other 


20 



ele«ents contributed to its Baking. The typewriter 
included concepts from novable type, the piano, the sewing 
aachine, the telegraph, and the clock. Clockwork suggested 
the idea of the escapeaent. A telegraph sender provided 
parts for the first writing aachine aodel. The first 
typewriter had a treadle for returning the carriage, thus 
reflecting the sewing machine. The piano contributed the 
concept of the free and swinging ares for iaprinting the 
letters. 

By 1874 the marketing of the typewriter was in full 
'swing. During July .to December 1874, 400 of the Kemington 
aannfactured typewriters were sold at a price of $125. k 
nanber of other models from different nanufacturers were 
also being developed at this tine. The Hemington machine 
was of a typebar construction. Also popular were the 
machines utilizing the concept of the typewheel. This form 
was started by John Pratt who built several machines in 
England -- all of which were not successful. James Hammond 
and Lucien S. Crandall, also inventors, were taking out 
patents on a typewheel aachine. A deadlock was reached 
between the three competitors. Pratt finally yielded to 
Haaaond, thus receiving a royalty. Crandall applied for a 
patent on a typesleeve instrument. The first Haanond 
patent was issued in 1880 which led to the development of 
the first practical typewheel aachine. Haaaond had a 
seni-circulur keyboard called the "ideal" keyboard but 


21 



eventually switched to the universal keyboard. By 1923, 
the Hannond typewheel machine was still the leading machine 
of its kind.** 

By the 1880’s coapetition was keen. In 1878 

Beainqton used Fairbanks 5 Co., the famous scale 

aanufacturers, to handle the selling of the aachines. 

However, Yost was still the best salesman of the 
typewriters. Under hia he had a man by the naie of Killian 
Kyckoff who was also an excellent salesman. Sales were 
slow at first with only *1,000 machines made and sold during 
‘the first four years of the Reminqton manufacture. Then in 
1879 Yost quit sellinq Remington typewriters. He and E.H. 
Johnson, a manufacturer of bandages and adhesive tape, 

formed the American Writing Machine Company. Yost used 
some of Censmore’s patents of the Typewriter Company. By 
1881 they were ready for marketing. At that time, the No. 
1 sold for $60 and the Ho. 2 for $80. Thus, Yost’s machine 
-- "the Caliqraph" — was cheaper than the Remington. 12 The 
Beainqton's fouqht back and retained the firm of Kyckoff, 
Seamans 6 Benedict to take over the sellinq of the 
machines. An aqrcement was reached whereby the selling 
agency would take all the nachines Remington could produce. 


And in that year 

1200 

Beainqton 

machines 

were sold. 


Densmore, 

who 

had 

given 

patents 

to both 

the 

Remingtons and 

to 

Yost, 

was 

getting 

tribute from 

both 


sides. In 1880 his company, the Typewriter Company, 


22 



received fees from 610 machines.In 1881 fees were received 
from 1170 machines. This was followed in 1682 by 2273 
units, in 1883 by 3376 units and in 1884 by 4000 units. 

Durinq the years 1881-1884 there were 7,000 caliqraph 
Machines sold. Sy 1885 the field widened and one could buy 
a Hammond, a Crandall and a Hall eachine — all of which 
vere separate from the Typewriter Coapany patents. Still 
however, the best sellers were the Beainqton and Caliqraph 
Machines. Durinq these years Kyckoff, Seamans C Benedict 
repeatedly lowered their prices. In 1883 the Reminqton 
'Machines sold for S100 with a shift and $80 without. By 
1885 this bad been reduced to $95 with a shift and $75 
without. Keanwhile, the Yost prices had increased to S85 
with a shift and $70 without.Throuqh these years the 
Reminqton Machine was still more popular than the Yost 
Machine. In 1885 Yost sold as many Machines as he had in 
the previous four years. 

By 1866 the Rerainqtons felt sales vere still not 
heavy enouqb and were forced to sell. Benedict went to 
Ilion and tried to talk Philo out of sellinq. Vhen he was 
assured that Philo was serious ho bouqht the operation for 
$186,000 with $10,000 down. The purchasers were Vyckoff, 
Seamans 6 Benedict, who took over the equipment and 
franchises of E. Reminqton and Sons.* 3 They took the name 
of the Reminqton Standard Typewriter Company. However, 
after the sale, the Reniuqt.ons had nothinq to do with tha 


23 



typewriter that carried their name.** 

Philo had sold the typewriter operation to help tha 
Reainqtons qet out of debt. The loney from the sale of the 
typewriter division didn’t last a week and left 90 percent 
of the outstanding debt unpaid. The Heninqton Company had 
been losing money on a number of ventures. In 1882 Samuel 
Reminqton died leaving the business to Philo and Eliphalet 
III. Neither of the survivinq sons had the business 
ability or salesmanship that Samuel had inherited from old 
Eliphalet. The years 1882-1886 were ones of steady drain 
‘for the Reminqtons. There were no contracts with foreiqn 
governments for arms which meant that the sporting arms 
business would have to carry the armory. The winter of 
1885-1686 was a time of crisis which eventually led to the 
sale of the typewriter. On April 4, 1889 Philo had died 
and Eliphalet III retired from the business.»s Thus an era 
had ended. The management of the arms company was out of 
the hands of the Remington family forever. Younq blood had 
entered and once aqain the Remington Arms Company became 
prosperous. 

The sale of the Typewriter concern by the Remingtons 
was a mistake. An article in the Scientific American 
estimated that in 1886, 50,000 machines were made and sold. 
Two years later, the Remington Standard Typewriter Company 
was making 1500 machines a month and still couldn't keep up 
with the demand. In 1640 a federal census of Typewriters 


24 



and Supplies estimated that, there were 30 established firms 
with a capital investment of $1,421,783 with 1,735 
employees, $1,078,203 in total wages, $632,723 in cost of 
materials and $3,630,126 in the value of the finished 
products.** In addition to the production of the Remington 
Ho. 1 and So. 2, the Remington No. 3 was introduced to meet 
the requirements of the British market. And by 1890 the 
typewriter was an important element in the British 
commercial world. 

As had occurred in a number of other industries at 
‘the turn of the century, a combination amonq a number of 
typewriter companies took place in 1893. The combination 

included the Remington Company, the early promoters, 
Densmore and Yost, and the four Smith brothers, who had 
formed a typewriter company. The resulting combination was 
called the Union Typewriter Company of America. 17 

Alonq with the rivalry that existed among thi 
typewriter manufacturers an equally intense rivalry 
developed between two competing systems of typing. The 
touch method of typing utilized the single keyboard and the 
shift key while the other methods utilized the double 
keyboard. The dispute was finally settled at Cincinnati in 
July of 1080. A contest was held between a Mr. Hc3urrin 
using the touch method and a Nr. Traub using the other 
method. NcGurrin won easily havinq taught himself the 
touch Method of typing in 1878. 


25 



C. Hew E ntries 


But the forces of competition remained vigorous. 
Franz X. Haqnar, who had designed the variation of the 
Bemington called the Caliqraph, for Tost, was not included 
in the new Union Typewriter Company. Franz - Wagner, with his 
brother H. L. Baqner, developed a visible front-strike 
desiqn. John T. Underwood and his father, John Underwood, 
who had been a pioneer in the ribbons and carbon business, 
*bouqht the Waqner’s machine, beqinninq production in 1895. 
By 1099, Underwood moved to Hartford, Connecticut where a 
larqe factory was built to handle the larqe volume that had 
been achieved by the popularity of te Underwood Model 5. ,a 
The Underwood was tho first machine to achieve prominence 
with tho front-stroke machine. It represented a new 
departure in the arranqesent of the typebars which were 
placed in a sequent in front of the carriage thus allowing 
the type to print on the front of tho cylinder. It has 
been pointed out that this principle was the solution to 
tho problem of visible vritinq.*’ 

In 1903, the four Smith brothers left the combination 
that bad been formed into tho Union Company. They felt 
that the Union Typewriter Company laqqed in manufacturing a 
visible front-strike typewriter. Their company was called 
the L.C . Smith and Brothers Typewriter Company, since L.C. 


2 6 



Smith was the oldest brother. 

At this tine another inventor cane alonq. He was 
Edward B. Hess, "a former silk salesman and a brilliant 
tinkerer with mechanical qadqets." 20 Hess was aided by an 
excellent technical nanaqer, lewis C. Kyers. Hess reviewed 
his competition in the typewriter field. He felt that 
Underwood and L.C. Smith were correct in their emphasis on 
visibility. He recoqnized Reminqton’s powerful marketinq 
and distributinq system. But he saw room for considerable 
iaprovement in the typewriter, which he felt would enable 
"such a typewriter to obtain an important share of the 
market. 

Hess saw the followinq defects to be remedied: (a) 
the typewriter presswork could be improved, (b) while 
improvements had been made in increasinq visibility, the 
existinq clutter of knobs, bars, ribbon mechanism and other 
prolections spoiled the operator’s clear view, (c) 
typewriter costs were too hiqh and by improved desiqn could 
be reduced, (d) he felt that the ease of operation of the 
typewriter from the operator’s point of view could be 
increased. Durinq his lifetime Hess received IhO 
typewriter patents. 

The new Hess typewriter achieved a liqht, fast touch. 
Hess had invented a typebar action that beqan by novinq 
slowly when the key was depressed and accelerated as the 
key continued down. He had reversed the linkaqe so that 


27 



the action was a pull rather than a posh, representing an 
enerqy-savinq innovation. He removed much of the friction 
front the escapement, the toothvheel that links the keys 
with the carriage and moves it alonq one space when a 
letter is struck.Hess and Hyers also achieved a 
friction-free ball-bearinq one-tract rail to support the 
weiqht of the carriage as it moved back and forth, a new 
paper feed, a shield to keep eraser crumbs from fallinq 
into a nest of typebars, and "total, uncomprociised 
visibility." 2 * 

With the establishment of the Royal Typewriter 
Company in 1904, what were to be the big four of the 
typewriter industry had been established. These were: 
Remington (The Onion Typewriter Company), Underwood, L.C. 
Smith, and Royal. But by 1909 there were a total of 89 
separate typewriter companies in the Onited States. 
Indeed, well over 100 firms were established after the 
formation of the Royal Typewriter Company in 1904. Host of 
these post-Royal firms were started in the decade 
1905-1915. 

0. Proliferation of Entrants 

During the period immediately following the 
establishment of the Royal Typewriter Company, a large 
number of companies were in the competition for typewriter 


28 



sales. Some of the names continue to be familiar even as 
late as the post World War II period. Others never made a 
siqnificant penetration into the industry. Their names 
include the followinq: Acne, Alexander, Allen, American, 
Atlas, Barlock, Bennett, Benninqton, Blake, Brooks, 
Century, Cfcicaqo, Commercial visible. Corona, Cram, 
Crandall, Crown, Carlinq, Dauqherty, Demountable, Denscore, 
Dollar, Duplex, Edland, Elliott-Fisher, Ellis, Emerson, 
Essex, Fay-Sholes, Federal, Ford, Fountain, Fox, Franklin, 
Garbell, Hammond, Harris, Hartford, Hooven, International, 
‘Jackson, Jewett, Junion, Keystone, HcCall, Hanoqraph, 
Ferritt, Eolle, Ronarch, Hoon-Hopkins, Norris, flunson. 
National, Nickerson, Noiseless, Odell, Official, Oliver, 
People's, Pittshurqh, Postal, Rapid, Reliance , Reninqton, 
Rex, Royal, Schiesari, Secor, Sholes Visible, L.C. Smith, 
Smith Premier, Stearns, Sterlinq, Sun, Taylor, Triumph, 
Type-Adder, Underwood, Victor Visiqraph, Walker, Williams, 
Woodstock, World, lost, and Yu Ess. Then there were a 
number of leadinq imported machines includinq: Adler, 
A.E.G., Ideal, Kappcl, Mercedes, Hiqnon, Kcqina, Saxonia, 
Titania, Torpedo and Urania from Germany; Empire froa 
Canada; Hermes from Switzerland; Hesperia, Olivetti and 
Vittoria from Italy; Imperial, Salter and Wellinqton froa 
Enqland; Contin and K.A.P. from France; Japy from Japan .** 
By 1910, the number of patents issued for typewriters 
totaled 6,200. The sales volume in the U.S. for 


2 ? 



typewriters had reached $2 Billion. 

E. Competitive Process es in Operation 

The early history of the typewriter provides some 
instructive lessons in the processes of competition. The 
Dnion Typewriter Company, with Reminqton as its most 
important component firm, had achieved a dominant position 
provided by its advantaqe in qettinq started first in 1873. 
This, plus the stronq marketing orqanization, gave 
'Reminqton a dominant position during the 20 years 
intervening before the formation of the Union Typewriter 
Company with Reminqton as its principal component. 

If the combination expected that because it 
represented a larqe portion of the typewriter industry, its 
market position was protected, it was a serious error.The 
establishment of Underwood in 1B95 and then the formation 
of the L.C. Smith Typewriter Coupany in 1903 brouqht 
conpotition in the form of technical innovation. The 
front-strike visibility introduced by Underwood and h.C. 
Smith enabled them to cut substantially into Remington's 
position. 

The achievements of Underwood's Model 5 wore 
particularly outstanding, so that by 1920 Underwood's sales 
of Model 5 wore equal in quantity to all of the other tiros 
in the typewriter industry combined. The Model 5 was a 


30 



Tisible writer which had the advantages of the blind 
machines as well as some of its own. Eesides being a 
visible nachine, the touch of the machine was a light one. 
The Underwood wachine was the first to have a tabulator as 
part of the actual typewriter which was supplied without 
additional charqe. The machine was a good stencil cutter 
and as a canifolder its capabilities were unequaled. Other 
machines with a large number of sheets inserted produced 
indifferent alignment resulting from the letters coming 
fro» all directions; whereas with the Underwood the common 
‘center was not chanqed because the letters were arriving at 
the printing point from one direction. Other advantages 
included the fact that corrections were made easily, the 
type could be cleaned in a moment, the machine was a silent 
machine — one of the quietest, and the escapement 
mechanism was sinqularly rapid. In fact all of the 
advantages could be summarized in this statement: 


... the Underwood claims to be a complete 
typewriter, complete in itself, without the 
addition of any extra devices or attachments. It 
has, therefore, no special plater for manifolding 
and no special tract to preserve alignment while 
so doinq; no additional holders for envelopes or 
cards, no countinq device, no tabular scales; 
nothinq in tact, but what is supplied at the 
first cost with the machine. 23 


Underwood was so pleased with its flodcl 5 that the 
tir« laqged in the adoption of a new model. Thus in 


31 



laqqinq in brinqinq out new developsents, Underwood fell 
behind, so that by 1938, Royal had the doninant position in 
the typewriter industry. The subsequent history will be 
analyzed in a later chapter. 


32 



FOOTNOTES TO CHAPTER II 


1. John Zellers, The Typewriter:^ A Short History on its 
75t h Anniversary (Rev York: The Newcomen Society of 
England, American Branch, 1998) pp. 8-9. 


2. Herkimer County Historical Society, The St ory of th e 
Typewriter 18 73-1923 (Herkimer: Herkimer Historical 
Society, 1923) p. 20. 


3- ifeid., p. 20. 


9. Tilqham Richards, The History & Development of 
'Typewriters (London: Her Hajesty's Stationery Office, 1969) 

p. 19. 


5. Zellers, op. cit .. pp. 9-10. 


6. Richard !!. Current, The Typewriter and the Hen who Hade 
It (Urbana, Illinois: The University of Illinois Prass, 
1959) pp. 9-10. 


7. Zellers, op^ cit.. p. 10. 


8. Hatch, Aldan, R eni n ato n Arms - AD American History (Sew 
York: Rinehart 6 Co., Inc., 1956) p. 80. 


9. Ibid., p. 172. 


10. Current, op, cit., p. 65. 


11. Georqe Hares, History of the Typewriter, (London: 
Gulbert T. Pitnan, 1919) p. 190. 


12. Current, op,, cit .. p. 103 


33 







13. Current, op. cit., pp. 108-109 


I 1 *- Ibid., P- 109. 

15. Batch, op. cit., p. 176. 

16. Current, op. cit., p. 112. 

17. Bruce Eliven, The Wonderful Writing Machine (New lork 
Bandoa House, 1954) p. 87. 


18. 

Ibid., 

p. 88. 

19. 

fares. 

op. cit., p. 187. 

20. 

Bliven 

, QSjl Sii., pp. 88- 

21. 

Ibid., 

p. 89. 

22. 

Ibid., 

p. 95. 

23. 

fares. 

op. cit., p.190. 


34 




CHAPTER III 


ECONOHIC FHAKEWORK OF THE TYPEWRITER INDUSTRY 


This chapter on the economic characteristics of the 
typewriter industry will be concerned with five specific 
areas: 

A. Product Types and Variations 

B. Cost and Production Characteristics 

C. Barket Structure Analysis 

D. New Entry Characteristics 

E. Profit Performance over Time 

A. Product TY£"§ and Variations 

Typewriters are now divided into three major 
catcqories: Eanual, Electric, and Specialized- The manual 

and electric typewriters are further divided into office 
and portable types. The specialised typewriters are those 
used in connection with calculating and billing, or in 
connection with data processinq. For example, IBM 
manufacturers a maqnetic tape solectric typewriter which 
records material on a magnetic tape and produces final 
copies! at ISO word:; per minute. At present the BT/ST can 
be used to enter data directly into the Il’B Syster/360 
computer through a new tape cartridge reader. Royal 


35 




produces an automatic typinq system which performs a task 
similar to the IBR product but without the computer hookup. 
Royal also manufacturers a machine called the 5000 Source 
Document Writer, which has a hiqh speed automatic system to 
produce punched paper tape or edqe punched cards while 
typinq oriqinal source documents such as purchase orders, 
sales orders or shipping memos. The machines described 
above are mostly related to the task of typinq oriqinal 
documents and simultaneously feeding the information into 
computers. Other machines related to the computers are 
'typewriters that allow direct access to the storage unit 
for corrections or revisions to the proqram or data; 
printers which provide output by line rather than by 
letter; and keypunch machines which utilize similar 
features of the typewriter but which provide output through 
cards or tape. 

Some significant changes have been takinq place in 
the share of market accounted for by each of the 
categories. Fiqure III-1 provides a summary sheet of 
industry sales for the years 19*»8 to 1967 broken down 
between the main categories of portable, office and 
specialized typewriters. Data for all the fiqures in this 
chapter and the figures to all chapters are provided in the 
Appendix to the Dissertation. The figure indicates that 
portables held a relatively constant share of the market, 
fluctuating in the range of 22 to 2C percent over a long 


n 



FIGURE III-I 


PATTERN OF TYPEWRITER SALES IN 
THE UNITED STATES, 194801967 

(A) 



37 




FIGURE III-I 
(Continued) 

(B) 



(a) Data not collected in these years 


Source: Facts for Industry Series M35C, 1958-1967. 
Bureau of the Census, U.S. Department of 
Cor.imorce. 


38 



period of years. The office Machine segment of the Market 
has held steady at about a 70 percent Market share. 
Specialized typewriters have been increasing their share up 
to about the 10 percent level. 

h significant shift has taken place, however, in the 
Market share trends between the Manual and electric 
typewriters. This is best seen by analyzing the share of 
the office typewriter market accounted for by the two 
types. In 1948, office electrics accounted for 14 percent 
of the total office typewriter Market. By 1956 this 
’percentage had increased to a 50 percent share of the 
Market. By 1967 the share had risen to 76.5 percent. 
Thus, share of the office typewriter narket accounted for 
by the electric typewriters has been increasing from two to 
five percentage points each year. Today the market share 
of the office electric market represents the segment of 
qreatest significance, for this is the largest portion of 
the total typewriter Market. It is the most rapidly 
qrovinq segment in both absolute and percentage terms. Its 
share of the office typewriter Market is likely to continue 
to increase to well over 90 percent in the years ahead. 

Thus a number of changes in the structure of the 
Market have been taking place.In addition, changes have 
occurred in the O.S. share of world typewriter production. 
The nature of foreign typewriter markets and the reasons 
for the shifting O.S. role in these Markets will be 


3 ? 



discussed in Chapter V. Another method for studying change 
in the typewriter industry is the examination of changes in 
cost and production characteristics of the industry. 

B. Cost an d Produc tion Characteristics 

The typewriter industry employs about 19,000 persons 
with a total annual payroll of $117 million. About 14,000 
or 75 percent of the employees are production workers. The 
other 5,000 employees are administrators, enginerring, 
’marketing, technical, and training personnel. 1 

Important to the manufacture of typewriters is the 
development of component parts necessary for assembly. 
About 70 percent of the 21 establishments in the industry 
perform other working operations. These fifteen 
establishments employ over 95 percent of the total 
production workers in the industry, of whom 70 percent are 
employeed in metal working operations. The types of 
operations involved in metal working and the percentage of 
employees engaged in each type of operation arc as follows: 
Assemblers (562), machinists (12’), stampers, blockers and 
formers (10"), tool and dye makers (51) and automatic screw 
machine operations, electroplating, painting and 
lacquering, plastics molding, and heat treating of metals 
(42). This provides some indication of the nature of the 
manufacturing operations in the production of typewiiters. 


*0 




The typewriter is a complex item to produce. The 
number of parts is large, ranginq fron 1800 for a portable 
to as hiqh as 3800 for an office electric typewriter. 
Other attributes are suqqested by Figure III-2, which 
presents a nuaber of cost of production characteristics of 
typewriters for the period 1953-1965. The value added per 
production worker for typewriters in 1965 had reached over 
$21,000. Value added is 75 percent of shipments for the 
typewriter industry. In contrast, value added per 
production worker for computing and related machines is 
'over $30,000, while valued added is 64 percent of 
shipments. The value of shipments in the typewriter 
industry approximated $400 million in 1965 with capital 
expenditures fluctuating, but averaqinq about $10 million 
per year. Total employment in the industry in 1965 was 
over 18,000, with a payroll totalling almost $120 million, 
tiaqcs per production worker »an hour reached $2.72 as 
compared with $3.19 for the computing and related nachines 
industry. The value added per dollar of wages, however, 
was 54.01 in the typewriter industry compared with $4.69 in 
the corputinq industry. 

There are four categories in the SIC category 357 
office nachines. These are computing and related machines, 
typewriters, scales and balances, and office machines not 
elsewhere classified. It is of interest to note the shire 
of the business machine market accounted for by typewriters 





FIGURE-III-2 
(Continued) 


Value Added as a 
Percent of Shipments 



Value Added per 
Production Worker 


Amounts in 



Value of Shipments per 
Production Workers 



Value Added per 
Dollar of Wages 

Amounts in 



Source: Industry Profiles , 1958-1965 (Washington: U.S. 

Government Printing Office, B.D.S.A. 1966) p. 105. 




over tine. This is shown in Fiqure III-3. The share of 
typewriters in this total market has declined between 1958 
and 1965 from 14 percent of the total to 9 percent of the 
total. The share of all the other cateqories of business 
machines has also declined, except for computinq and 
related machines. Computing and related machines rose from 
66 percent of this total market to 70 percent during the 
interval 1958-1965. 

It is clear that computinq and related machines have 
taken over many of the functions of the other types of 
'business machines. Typewriters are playing a much larger 
role in connection with computer use and other data 
processing and telecommunication devices. Without the 
ability to join effectively and relate to this most rapidly 
expanding segment of the market, a firn concentrating 
exclusively on typewriters would be certain to run into 
increasing, business difficulties. 

To this point a description of the various product 
catagories in the typewriter industry and the relative 
chanqes that have occurred within these cataqories has been 
presented. A description of the various cost and 
production characteristics was also presented to further 
clarify the picture of the typewriter industry and to 
demonstrate the ever increasing role computers and related 
products are playinq in the total office equipment field, 
kith these facts in mind one may now turn to an analysis of 





FIGURE III-3 


SHARE OF PRODUCTION DATA FOR 
INDUSTRIES IN SIC 357 CATEGORY 



(a) Data not collected in these years 


Source: Industry Profiles . 1958-1065 (Washington, 
D.C., U.S, Government Department of 
Commerce, Business and Defense Service 
Administration, 1966) p. 105 . 



the Backet structure of the typewriter industry. 

C. Karke t Structure An alysis 

It was initially stated that one of the foremost 
reasons for undertaking this study was to analyze the shift 
that has taken place in the aarket structure of the 
typewriter industry and to determine the inpact of this 
shift on the future competitive atmosphere of this 
industry. 

It is hypothesized that the typewriter industry 
evolved throuqh three distinct market structure phases. 
First, the industry was highly competitive; then it was 
transformed into an oligopoly; and finally it evolved into 
a partial monopoly. The purpose of this section is two 
fold: first, to determine how the typewriter industry could 
conform to the traditional economic definitions of 
oligopoly and partial monopoly and secondly, to determina 
the validity of the hypothesis on market structure. 

An oligopolistic industry can be defined as one in 
which the number of sellers is saall enough for the 
activities of a single seller to affect other firas and for 
the activities of other firms to affect him. Typically, 
firas in an oligopolistic industry sell differentiated 
products. The products are good substitutes for each 
other—that is, they have high cross elasticities of 



demand—but they have their own distinguishing features. 


Hhen 

sellers 

in 

an oligopoly 

arc numerous and 

relatively 

small— 

tho 

number of 

fringe sellers is 


qreat—the interdependence of sellers is less, collusion is 
harder to attain and difficult to maintain, and performance 
tends tovard that of atomistic competition. This is due to 
the fact that the number of firms is so great that no one 
firm or seller has any influence on price. 

Hovefer when fewer and fewer firms account for a 
continually larger share of the total market of that 
‘industry—with the number of frinqe sellers being 
relatively few—the industry would tend to be fairly 
concentrated and the pure competitive nature of that 
industry would be seriously hindered. Concentration in 
this context refers to the ownership or control of a large 
portion of some aggregate of economic resources or economic 
activity. 

In the past concentration of economic power has been 
deplored on two qrounds. First it is not considered to be 
consistent with the democratic ideal of a wider dispersion 
of control of economic affairs among a larger proportion of 
the population. And secondly the existing pattern of 
distribution of economic power could imply a reduction in 
the effectiveness of competition both from the standpoint 
of limit!nq the availability of new entry as well as the 
possibility of deriving excessive profits from potential 



collusion 


Various federal aqencies have distinguished 

oligopolistic industries according to the degree of seller 


concentration as measured 

both 

by 

the proportion 

of 

industry output supplied 

by a 

few 

sellers—2,4,6, 

or 8 

sellers—and by the number 

of small 

sellers who operate 

on 


the fringe. 

An oligopoly can consist of a high, medium, or low 
degree of concentration where the 8 largest sellers 
together supply 80, 60, or 40 percent of the output, 
‘respectively. Generally speaking high concentration is 
deternined when the eight largest firms supply 70 percent 
or more of the industry market. Koderate concentration 
exists when the 8 largest firms account for less than 70 
percent of the market. As previously mentioned, the reason 
to distinguish oligopoly on the basis of the degree of 
seller concentration is that with a hiqh degree of seller 
concentration express or tacit collusion is possible with 
excessive profits resulting. This is due to the high 
degree of interdependence of sellers when they are very few 
and large relative to the total market. 2 

With the basic concept of oligopoly established, both 
in terms of the theory and the way in which it is measured, 
one may next turn to the typewriter industry itself and 
determine if in fact this industry’s market structure fits 
within the formal framework of oligopoly. The typewriter 



industry, for the period 1935 through 1966, was 
characterized by a relatively high deqree of concentration 
as measured by the four largest and eight largest firms. 
These data are presented in Table III-1. 

The percentage share of industry value supplied by 
the four largest firns fluctuated within the relative range 
of 76 to 83 percent during the post-war period. The share 
of the eight larqest firms was 99 percent for' five of the 
six years for which the concentration ratios were 
calculated. 

■ One may thus observe that during this period the 
typewriter industry has been very heavily concentrated. 
The deqree of concentration as measured by total industry 
value (sales) would indicate that this industry definitly 
fits within the structure of an oligopolistic industry. 

Another way of determining the degree of oligopoly 
within the industry is thronqh an analysis of the chanqe in 
the market shares for individual firms over time. From the 
previous chapter, it can be seen that during the early 
1900's the industry was fairly competitive, with some 80 to 
90 foreiqn and domestic producers of typewriters involved. 
Immediately proceeding World War II, the industry was 
characterized as one with five predominant producers. The 
four larqest -- Remington, Royal, Underwood and L.C. Smith 
— each had 20 percent of the market, with International 
Business Machines accounting for 10 percent of the market. 3 



TABUS HI-1 


MARKET SHAKE RELATIONS, TYPEWRITERS 


Tear Humber of Product Value Percentage of Industry Value of 

_ Companiea ( $ In millions) Product Supplied Br _ ’ 

Four largest firms Eight largest 
_flies 


1935 

(HA) 

(HA) 

(HA) 

99 

1947 

23 

154 

79 

96 

1954 

15 

173 

83 

99 

1958 

15 

230 

79 

99 

1963 

17 

315 

76 

f 

99 

1966 

(HA) 

534 

79 

99 


Sources: Concentration Ratios In Manufacturing Industry , 1958, A 

report prepared for the Senate Subcommittee on Antitrust and 
Monopoly of the Committee on the Judiciary (Washington, D.C.: 
O.S. 3epartment of Commerce, Bureau of Census, 1562). Also, 
see the same publication for the year 1963 , which appeared In 
1964. 

Data for 19 66 from Annual Survey of Manufacturers , 1966 , U.S. 
Department of Ccncerce, Value-of-Saipaent Concentration Ratios 
by Industry. 


50 



Thus an industry that once was comprised of close to 
100 firms consolidated into one with five firms accounting 
for 90 percent of the market — a situation which, by the 
definition stated above, can only be termed oligopolistic. 
Today , however, the picture is considerably changed. 
International Business Hachines, which had 10 percent of 
the market in the early 1940's, has substantially increased 
its market share while the others have decreased their 
share. Table III-2 presents market share relations for the 
five largest domestic producers from 1960-1967. It can be 
“observed that Royal has had a steady decline of its 
over-all market share from 1960 to 1967. This might 
reflect the firm's concentration in the manual line of 
typewriters—a line also decreasing as a percent of total 
industry sales (as shown in Figure III-1). Data on SCM 
indicate that the market share has been maintained, and in 
1967 a small increase was noted. Data for 
Olivetti-Undorwood is scarce and not much can be concluded 
about it except that apparently a decrease in its share of 
the market occurred from 1966-1967. It appears that IBS 
has increased its market share from 29.0 to 33 percent 
during the two years for which data was available. Data on 
Remington was not available, and no conclusions regarding 
it can be reached (except that, as noted in 1967, its share 
of tho market was only *> percent). It is apparent that, 
since World War II, IPK has been increasing its market 


51 



TABLE XU-2 


Vi 

N 


MARKET SHARE RELATIONS OVER TIME 
($ Amounts In Millions) 

Tear ended Industry Olivetti- 


JUne 30 • 

Sales 

Royal 


SCM 


Underwood • 

IBM 


Remington 


($ Amounts 
In 000's) 

Sales 

i 

Sales 

i 

Sales 

i 

Sales 

$ 

Solea f 

1959 

$277,677 

$77.7 

28.0 

$38.0 

13.7 

$ (a) 


$(a) 


$ (a ) 

i960 

273,973 

68.6 

24.6 

(a) 


(a) 


(a) 


(a) 

1961 

304,416 

70.6 

23.2 

36.1 

u.8 

(a) 


(a ) 


(a) 

1962 

327,972 

72.8 

22.2 

41.0 

12.5 

35.7 

10.9 

95.2 

29.0 

(a) 

1963 

325,578 

73.9 

22.7 

43.6 

13.4 

(a) 


(a) 


(a ) 

1964 

362,837 

76.2 

21.0 

29.6 

8.2 

(a) 


(a) 


(a) 

1965 

430,066 

86.4 

20.1 

(a) 


(a) 


(a) 


(a ) 

1966 

564,191 

U6.8 

20.7 

(a) 


85.8 

15.2 

(a) 


(a) 

1967 

490,983 

95.0 

19-3 

86.0 

17.5 

65.0 

13.2 

.165.0 

33.6 

26,0 5*3 


(a) Data not era liable 

Source: frets for Industry. Series M35C, 1948-1967, Bureau of the Census, U.S. Dept of CoixeroeJ 
VjW 1» 1?62) j SCM. Annual- Reports, 1957-1967} "Olivetti, Crisis of Identity".Fortune 
poly IS^ShTesttoony before the Foacrul Trade Comisclon In the application of Litton Industries 
to Kcrce with1 Triuaph-Adler, April 10, 1969* Data for Royal was obtained from oompany 
sources ; it was not possible to indepondontly verify tho data* 





shares at the expense of the other firms. 

To further examine this apparent shift one may 
analyze the market shares by segments of the typewriter 
industry for 1967. This analysis is set forth in Table 
III-3. In portable typewriters, SCH is the market leader, 
with 43.5 percent of the market. This is attributed to 
SCH’s stronq position in electric portables, a field in 
which it concentrated early and developed a hiqhly 
effective model. Royal is second, but its strength remains 
in the manual portion of the portable typewriter market. 

*The share of the portable typewriter market held by firms 
other than the biq five, accounts for 17.6 percent {the 
larqest market share held by this category). 

is previously mentioned, the office typewriter market 
* { 
is divided into two ma-jor parts — the electric and tha 

manual. In the manual seqncnt of the office typewriter 

market. Royal has the larqest share — 40.8 percent. 

Olivetti-Underwood holds the second position with sliqhtly 

over 28 percent. Combined , the two account for two-thirds 

of the market. When Remington’s share of 14 percent is 

added, the three account for 80 percent of the market. 

However, as noted in Fiqure III-1, the manual portion of 

the office typewriter market is a snail and declining share 

of the market. Of the three categories presented in Tibia 

III-3, the manual office typewriter accounts for only 17 

percent of the total market. 


53 



TABIE HI-3 

MARKET SHARES BY SEGMEOT OF THE TYPEWRITER INDIE TRY, 1967 
($ Amounts In OOO's) 

MARKET SHARE PERCENTAGES 


OFFICE 



GO 

Electric 

(B) (C) 

Full-featured 

Electric Manual 

(D) 

Portable 

00 

Total 

Sales 

IBM 

60 . 0 * 

73.7* 

— 

— 

$165 

SCM 

9.7 

.8 

2.2 

43^5 

86 

Remington 

2.1 

1.7 

14.0 

5.8 

26 

Royal 

11.2 

9.0 

1 * 0.8 

23.1 

95 

Olivetti- 

Ucdervood 

10.4 

5-5 

28.1 

10.0 

65 

Other 

6.6 

9.3 

14.9 

17.6 

54 

TOTAL 

100 . 0 * 

100 . 0 * 

100 . 0 * 

100 . 0 * 


Total Sales 

$ 273,685 

$ 237,633 

$84,o66 

$ 133,232 

$ 490,983 

Percent of 
Total 

55.7* 

1*8.1** 

17.1* 

27 . 2 * 

100.0* 


(a) U.S. Shipments of complete typewriter* 


Source: Testimony before the FTC, April 10, 1969 . Data was 

originally obtnmnd from Royal Coruorsto sources 
It was not possible to Independently rerify the 

da ta . 


54 



In contrast, in the office electric typewriter field 
, IBB has at least 60 percent of the market. Royal, 
Olivetti-Underwood, and SCK each have about 10 percent. In 
the full-featured deluxe seqsent of the office electric 
typewriter market, IBB alone held almost three-quarters of 
the industry sales in 1967. SCB 's share drops to less than 
1 percent because of its concentration in the smaller, 
portable type of electric Machine. The full-featured 
electric typewriter is a substantial portion of the office 
eletric field — 86.9 percent. > 

Thus for example. Royal's 90 percent of the manual 
seqment of the office typewriter market represents 40 
percent of 17 percent of the total markets, or only a 7 
percent share of the market, over-all. Table III-4 shows 
the individual market shares for each company divided into 
the various typewriter categories. As was previously 
shown. Royal accounts for 19.3 percent of the typewriter 
■arket and is second only to IBB which has 33.6 percent of 
the over-all market. This is reflected by the fact that 
IBfl has 60 percent of the office electric markets, which is 
56 percent of the total market, thus accountinq for 33.6 
percent of the entire market. It may also be noted that 
SCB has 17.5 percent of the total market followed by 
Olivetti-Underwood's 13.2 percent share and Reirinqton’s 5.3 
percent share. 

According to the formal definition of oligopoly and 


55 



TABLE UX-4 


OVER-ALL MARKET SHARE El TYPEWRITER INDtSTHY, I967 
($ Amounts in Millions) 



IBM 

SCM 

Remington 

Royal 

Olivetti- 

Itaderwood 

Other 

TOTAL 

Office: 







* 

Electric 

165 

26 

6 

30 

28 

19 

274 

Manual 

• 

— 

2 

12 

34 

24 

12 

84 

Portable: 

— 

58 

8 

31 

13 

23 

133 

TOTAL 

165 

8 6 

26 

95 

65 

54 

491 “ 

Share of Total 
Typewriter 

Market 33.6 17.5 

5.3 

19.3 

13.2 

11.0 

99.936 


( 1 ) U.S. Shipmants of complete typewriters 

Source: Testimony before the PTC, April 10, 1969. Data was 

originally obtained from Royal Corporate sources. 
It was not possible to independently verify the 

data. 


56 




the methods used to measure concentration, the typewriter 
industry would be classified as a hiqhly concentrated 
oliqopoly. At first the industry was fairly competitive 
with close to 100 firms. Durinq the 1930»s and 1940»s the 
industry became an oliqopoly with five predominant firms. 
And now the industry can be characterized as one of partial 
■onopoly with IEW beinq the dominant factor. 

If, accordinq to economic theory an industry is 
classified as an oliqopoly, by definition it is reasonable 
to expect the presence of barriers to entry. Since the 
‘typewriter industry has been shown to fit the qeneral 
definition of oliqopoly, an important aspect of a study of 
this industry would, of necessity include analysis of any 
such barriers present. 

D. Wow E ntry Ch a racterist ics 

From a theoretical standpoint the condition of entry 
into an industry can be measured by the extent price may be 
elevated above the competitive level without attractinq new 
entry. With the competitive price beinq defined as the 
minimum attainable averaqe cost includinq a return to the 
owner, one could refine the above definition to state that 
the condition of entry is measured by the lonq run qap 
between minimum cost and price which the most favored firm 
(one with the larqest price-cost qap) can reach without 


57 



inducing entry.* 

In any discussion of barriers to entry four 
particular barriers are qenerally considered. 

(D Scale Economy Barrier 

(2) Absolute Cost Barrier 

(3) Product Differentiation Barrier 

(<») Capital Requirements Barrier 

Economies of scale arise when production and 
distribution costs decline per unit of output as the size 
of the plant increases. The optimal scale exists where the 
'unit costs are at a minimum. Siqnificant economies of 
scale will occur if the minimum optimal scale is a 
siqnificant fraction of the total industry sales. This is 
a deterrent to entry, for to obtain a significant reduction 
in per unit costs, one has to have a large percentage of 
the industry output or add to the industry output in a 
siqnificant manner. The deterrent to entry will increase 
as both the minimum optimal scale becomes a larger 
proportion of total industry output and the rise of unit 
costs becomes steeper as the scale is reduced below the 
minimum optimal scale. 

A typical averaqe cost curve faced by a firm is that 
which is depicted in Figure Ill-h where over a qiven range 
of output the averaqe cost curve is somewhat flat. This 
means that there is some ranqe that is larger than the 
minimum optimal scale in which a firm's per unit cost is 


58 



FIGURE HI-4 


GRAPHIC ANALYSIS OF ECONOMIES OF SCALE 


Production 

and 

Distribution 
costs per 
unit of 
output 


Q (cin) Q (max) 

Scale of the fim (in units of output capacity) 


FIGURE IH-2 



\_ 

• I 

I f 

: : 

i 


Source: Joe Ealn, Industrial' Organization (New York: John Wiley 
and Sons, 1959) P* 154. 

Joe Bain, Barriers to New Ccmetltlon (Cambridge, Massachusetts: 
Harvard University Press, !9>o) p. 107. 


59 





just as low as the minisuB opticus . 5 Joe Bain, in an 
analysis of various barriers to entry, demonstrates the 
relation between average cost curves and economies of 
scale . 6 Observe that if the new firm enters above X, the 
established sellers cannot find a price above minimum cost 
OPfi which .will erclude his entry (if the entrant expects 
the established sellers to hold price uncbanqed). If one 
enters below X at d 3 d 3 * the established sellers can raise 
the price above P3 to P 3 . The established sellers were 
operating at d l d»* but now since they operate at d 3 d 31 they 
"can set the price to exclude entry at P 3 . 

The deqree to which established sellers can raise the 
price above the competitive level depends upon: ( 1 ) how 
crowded the industry is, ( 2 ) how steep the averaqe cost 
curve is and, (3) how elastic the industry demand curve is. 
If the demand curve were more elastic — d 4 d 41 — then the 
excluding entry price could be set as high as P 4 . If the 
averaqe cost curve were steeper — shift to AC 1 — then the 
excludinq price could be set at P s . If the industry were 
crowded so that the established firm had shares at d 3 d 3 ' 
instead of d'd 11 , entry would shift the shares to the left 
of d 3 d 3 * and result in a higher entry-excluding price. 

An analysis of the pro-electric era indicated that 
the proportion of industry capacity in the most efficient 
typewriter plant was from 10 to 30 percent or 150,000 to 
*150,000 units capacity per year . 3 It was also shown that 


6 0 



the relative unit costs rise substantially higher whan 
capacity falls to between 7.5 and 5 percent of the national 
market.* 

Sith the leadinq typewriter companies durinq the 
pre-electric era accountinq for approximately 20 percent of 
the larket each, scale economies represented a relatively 
substantial barrier to entry. The extent of economies of 
scale as barriers to entry in the typewriter industry today 
probably remains of a substantial order of magnitude. 

The second barrier to entry to be considered is that 
‘of absolute cost barriers.This type of barrier can arise 
from four basic sources. (1) Established firms can control 
superior production techniques through patents and secrecy, 
(2) Imperfections can exist in the input market so that 
established firms can secure inputs to their production 
process at lower prices, (3) Input factors may be owned or 
controlled by established firms, and (4) The established 
firms may qct better rates in the capital markets. 

On the basis of an analysis of the data of the late 
forties, it was concluded that absolute cost advantages 
•ere not very qreat.* This probably remains true today for 
nanual typewriters produced in the U.S. However, in the 
electric era two new elements have cmerqed to alter the 
picture—the production abroad of typewriters and the 
development of the electric typewriter, Uith the increase 
in volume of foreiqn production to the point where the 


6l 



scale advantages of American production have been 
diminished, the labor cost advantaqe of the foreign 
producer has become significant. Thus, there appear to be 
absolute cost advantages in the production of typewriters 
in foreiqn countries as compared with the nnited States. 

Bith regard to the electric typewriter, there appear 
to be significant absolute cost- advantages held by 
International Business Kachines Corporation. This 
conclusion is suggested by the data in Table III-5. This 
table provides data on the location and level of employment 
'in typewriter manufacturing plants in the United States. 
Usinq the mid-point of the employment code classification 
as the amount of employment at each location for all of the 
companies except IBK (where the upper figure is used) some 
rough comparisons nay be made. Accounting for 
approximately one-third of the total production of 
typewriters in the United States by value, IBK's 
employment, in its Lexington, Kentucky plant, would be at 
the most 5,000 employees. Using the middle point of the 
ranqe for the other companies, their total employment would 
be 17,800. Thus one-third of the industry volume by value 
is being produced with approximately 22 percent of the 
employmont. These relations are very gross approximations, 
but with a large volume of production of electrics, it is 
hiqhly probable that IBfl is able to automate, or have 
performed by machine, many operations which otherwise would 



TABLE III-5 

T /YTATTntt AND EKPLOYMEHT AT U.S. TIPEVIRITER 
MftHUFACTURING PLAIJTS* 


Estimated Employees 

Addressograph-Multigraph 
Varl-Typer Corp. 

Kevark, Hew Jersey 

Employment Code C 750 


Dura Corp. 

Dura Business Mach in es 
Madison Hts., Michigan 


> Employment Code B 

250 

International Business Machines 
Lexington, Kentucky 

Employment Code B 

5,000 

Litton Industries, Inc. 

Business Equipment Group 

Royal Office Typewriter Div. 
Hartford, Conn. 

Bnployment Code D 

2,500 

Business Equipment 

Royal Typer Dlv. 

Hendersonville, Mo. 

Employment Code B 

250 

Business Equipment Group 

Consumer Products Dlv. 

Springfield, lfc>. 

Employment Code C 

750 

Business Equipment Group 

Cole Steel Equipment Co. 

Tork, Penn. 

Baploynent Code D 

2,500 


Litton Subtotal 6 ,COO 





TABLE HI-5 (continued) 


Olivetti-Underwood Corp. 

Hartford Conn. 

Employment Code D 2,500 

SCM Corporation 

SCH-Smith Corona Dlv. 

Cortland, N.X. 

Employment Code C 750 

Bulse Mfg. 

Geneva, N.X. 

Employment Code A 50 

SCM-Sedth Corona Dlv. 

« Groton, N.X. 

Employment Code D 2,500 

SCM-Snith Corona Dlv. 

S. Cortland, N.X. 

Employment Code D 2,500 

SCM Subtotal 5,800 

Sperry Rand Corp. 

Remington Office Equipment 
Elmira, N.X. 

Employment Code D 2,500 


TOTAL 
Total 

without IBM 

*It la of Interest to note that the Royal Plant at Henderson, North 
Carolina has been closed, as has the Underwood-Olivetti Plant In 
Hartford, Conn. The Cole Steel Equipment Plant at York, Penn, and 
the Kadison Heights, Michigan plant of Dura Corp. did not manu¬ 
facture typewriters. It is questionable whether the Vari-Typer Plant 
Of Addrcssograph-Multigraph at Newark, H.J. can be regarded as a 
typewriter plant. Code Key: A - under 100 employees, B - 100-499* 
c - 500-999* D - 1,000 - 4,999, E - 5,000 and over. 

Adapted from Fortune , 1966 Plant and Product Directory of the 1,000 
largest U.S. Industrial Corporations, Vol. II, SIC 3572. 


22,800 

17,800 


64 



have to be performed by high cost labor. 

These fiqures are intended to be mainly 
impressionistic. They are estinates in that the Biddle 
point of the ranqe had to be used instead of precise 
employment fiqures. Furthermore, it is well known that all 
of the typewriter companies, including IBH, have parts 
manufactured abroad—a substantial portion of which are 
used in the final assembly of typewriters, both in the U.S. 
and abroad. But if this analysis does nothinq more, it 
demonstrates that either IBH produces a substantial portion 
•of its parts and other typewriter needs abroad, or IBB has 
tremendous cost advantages and economies of scale in the 
production of its electric typewriter. If the first 
statement is accepted, the line of reasoning would be as 
follows: It is known that a substantial portion of 
production operations of other U.S. typewriter companies is 
performed abroad. IBS accounts for one-third by dollar 
value of the total typewriter market. Hence, it is 
unlikely that IPS is able to produce all of its needs in 
its one plant in Lexington, Kentucky. 

It is also known that on the average, labor has 
represented about 60 percent of manufacturing costs.* 0 It 
has been pointed out that for parts fabrication, assembly 
and labor, a sinqlo portable typewriter can take about 
seven to eight hours to build, while an eleric requires 
twenty-live hours. Thus one must conclude that if the 


*5 



first statement was not completely correct there are cost 
advantages or economies of scale in the production process. 

The best published data available to verify this 
point of view are that data related to the production of 
the IBB Selectric Typewriter. C.F. Vouqh, the General 
Banaqer of the Electric Typewriter Division of IBB, stated 
in an article that the two qreatest challenges facinq 
American Industry are foreign competition and the 
increasing cost of production. He felt that American 
^Industry must "maintain its plant and equipment at their 
hiqhsst level of capability at all times. ... A strong 
effort should be made to take advantage of new processes, 
new materials, and each manufacturer should develop new 
processes on his own".** 

Hith this philosophy, new technologies were developed 
and others advanced in the construction of the IBK 
Selectric Typewriter. The integrated plastic molding and 
electroplating for mass producing the precise printing 
elements were the major developments that led to IBM’s 
breakthrough in the single element typing field. Another 
advancement was the U3 station Cross transfer machine which 
performed 310 operations on the power frames — drilling, 
reaming, tapping, boring, pressing, milling and others. 
This couple* machine cost S950,000 with an additional 
S130.000 for tooling and qauging.** 

Another technological development which would lead to 


66 



lover production costs would be that of the elimination of 
secondary operations. Ss pointed out by Leslie Hoffman, 
Tool Enqineer for IBH, secondary operations are of primary 
importance in the nanufacturinq of precision stampings. 
The accuracy of holes is solely dependent on hole sizinq 
and countersinking operations which add considerable cost 
to the part. 13 He pointed out that the usual methods for 
sizinq and countersinking had najor disadvantages which 
were eliainated at IBK by performing piecing, hole sizinq 
and countersinking operations in the same progressive die. 

‘This process has resulted in significant time and dollar 
savings as veil as substantial improvements in the quality 
of the product. Thus the elimination of secondary 
operations in high volume production is quite desirable. 

Another technological innovation in the electric 
typewriter was the cam lever produced at the Kingston, H.Y. 
plant of I?E. The cam lever is a part that is brought into 
contact with a constantly rotating rubber roll which causes 
the lever to swing against a shaft that passes through a 
hole not far from the midpoint of the lever. With this 
motion the typebar is always actuated with the same force, 
so that uniform impressions are made regardless of the 
varyinq finger pressures applied. Formerly the cam lever 
was all steel and had the disadvantages of being expensive 
to machine. Some of the dimensions were hard to hold, wear 
occurred between the "serrations and the roll", and the 


6? 



noise produced was excessive. 411 of these factors led to 
the development of nylon components which reduced wear, 
gave lonqer life and were easily produced at a high rate 
and at a low cost. Silence in operation was achieved and 
no machining was required. The results were: the cost per 
lever was much lower; the quality was improved; and the 
life was increased. 

Harold Hare, a veteran assembler at IBM, commented 
that the typewriter production techniques acquired over 
past years were no lonqer applicable with the IBH 
‘Selectric. Though there was elimination of tine consuming 
operations such as type-bar alignment', the new assembly 
process required handling many more small parts. For 
example, the carrier and rocker assembly which rotated and 
tilted the printing head at "cobra like speeds" was 
composed of some 75 minute parts.Hany more gauqes and 
dial indicators were required with the new machine than 
with the typebar machines. 

Hany of the parts required for the IBH Selectric such 
as the printing heads, which are produced by a 25 nan team, 
ara produced at Lcxinqton. But it is interesting to note 
that durinq the early I960's as much as 70 percent of the 
required parts were purchased from other suppliers. For 
the entire line of the IBH Selectric there are 2,200 part 
nunbers. These facts night indicate that initial costs 
would be quite high, but other techniques are utilized to 


69 



reduced overall costs. 

Robot testinq of the IBH Selectric would create 
additional costs, but when completed the service and 
aaintenance expenses would be less. The Booverometer, a 
recently developed tool used for servicinq the IBH 
Selectric, would cut costs and estimated time of repair 
compared to the older bulky dial indicators used on service 
calls. Veiqhing just three-quarters of an ounce compared 
to the 14 pound dial indicator, this tool replaces the 
bulky dial and half cycle tool which cost eiqht times as 
‘much money. Aqain, a cost is incurred in the development 
of new technology, but it is done with lonq run cost 
reduction benefits in mind. 

It is apparent that a large percentage of IBH's parts 
have been purchased for the Selectric, but also it is 
apparent that a great effort was made to develop new 
automated techniques to produce various components. 
Technological innovation is a part of the qoal structure at 
IBf! and reflects one of the ways of cutting overall 
production costs and achicvinq cost advantages over other 
firms. 

From this data one may conclude that although 
absolute cost advantages did not exist durinq the 1930*3 or 
1940*s, it is quite apparent that in today's industry, with 
IBH as the industry leader, absolute cost advantages as a 
barrier to entry do in fact exist. 


69 



A third barrier to coapetition to be discussed is 
that of product differentiation. Product differentiation 
is the factor that differentiates a honoqenous industry 
(where all the products are sinilar) and a heterqenous 
industry (where basically the products are the sane—such 
as typewriters—but a qreat deal of enerqy has been 
expended to differentiate the product.) 

Product differentiation arises fron several sources. 
They are: (1) The narketinq and service orqanization that 
is available; (2) The deqree of advertisinq utilized; and 
*{3) The role of patents. 

Probably the critical inqredients to the success of 
any durable product, if it is close to that of competitors 
in terns of a price-perfornance trade-off, are the 
■arketinq orqanization and the availability of a service 
orqanization to provide prompt and effective repairs. In 
the typewriter industry the narketinq and service 
orqanization is an important forn of product 
differentiation. Products are distinquished and repeat 
sales are achieved on the basis of the product's reputation 
and acceptance. Product reputation and acceptance are 
based on four important characteristics of the product. 
These are: (1)product perfornance, (2) the annual 
Maintenance costs, (3) the quality, availability, and 
promptness of repair service, and (4) the distribution and 
effectiveness of narketinq and service orqanizations. 


70 



Unlike some consumer products, for which product 
differentiation nay be based on style or differences 
created and sustained in the mind of the consumer throuqh 
advertisinq, product differentiation for typewriters 
fundamentally depends upon other factors. These other 
factors are elements of performance with the four major 
dimensions indicated above. 

while advertisinq is present, its role is of a 
relatively small order of maqnitude. Advertisinq without a 
stronq marketinq and service organization would ba 
"relatively ineffective. 

Durinq the pre-electric era product differentiation 
represented a substantial barrier to entry on a par with 
scale economies. With the recent development of the 
electric typewriter and with fundamental desiqn changes 
this barrier to entry is today as great as it was durinq 
the 1930‘s and 1940*5. This is exemplified when looking at 
tho role patents play in today's market. Durinq the 1930*3 
and 1940•s product differentiation was significant but the 
basic product patents had expired and the differentiation 
consisted in desiqn or special "selling features" which 
were protected by patents. 15 With the advent of tho 
electric typewriter the change in the importance of patents 
was qreat and consisted of two important elements. First, 
the chanqe in the role of patents for the electrics relates 
to basic product operating characteristics. Attempts by 


71 



sobs of the typewriter companies, which had a tradition of 
manual nachines, to develop an electric typewriter ware 
incomplete. Some of these coapanies simply added a motor 
and related aechanisa to convert their basic manual 
machines into an electric. Bat the emphasis in the 
constrnotion of the two aachines is fundamentally 
different. Because the motor power-in the manual is the 
effort produced by the operator, the emphasis in the 
construction of the aachine is a minimum of friction to 
facilitate ease of movement of all the parts. On the other 
*hand, in the electric, the motor power is supplied from the 
outside. The emphasis in the fundamental construction is 
the ability of the machine to withstand the qreater jarcinq 
and thrust involved in the electric operation. As a 
consequence, the patents are of fundamental importance to 
the construction of the electric typewriter. 

In movinq from a manual typewriter to an electric 
typewriter, another aspect of patents becomes of qreat 
siqnificance. The basic desiqn of the manual had been 
established and unchanqed for about a fifty year period. 
In movinq throuqh various desiqns and models of the manual 
typewriter, product variations could be readily imitated by 
one typewriter company followinq the lead of another. But 
the* shift to an electric typewriter involved some 
fundamental new principles. The desiqn, cnqincorinq, and 
production methods involved fundamentally distinct and 


7 * 



different concepts. This moved the design and production 
process to the stage where patent and licensing 
arrangements took on a new significance. 

If a company were to buy the rights to the IBS 
patents on the electric typewriter and enter into a 
contract to pay a license fee for their production, their 
problems would have only begun. In the electro-mechanical 
and electronic fields, a patent represents not much more 
than the right of the engineering and research development 
departments of a company to begin efforts to "reverse 
‘engineer" the product. Patents do not provide 
specfications reguired for quidance of applications 
engineers, nor for establishing production methods and 
production operations. Larqe outlays are required; a 
relatively lonq qestation period or passage of time, 
considerable trial and error and substantial risk, as well 
as expenses of buyinq the patent riqhts and paying license 
fees before production could produce items on a competitive 
cost and price basis are also necessary. Thus, not just 
the patents, but the new technology of the larqest and 
fastest qrowinq segment of the typewriter market represents 
substantial barriers to entry tor a firm which has not 
mastered the intricate technology of the electric 
typewriter. 

The fourth barrier to entry to bo discussed herein is 
the capital requirements barrier. In an industry in which 


73 



there are heavy fixed costs relating to the use of plant 
and equipment and large marketing and distribution expense, 
a fire new to the area would require a substantial outlay 
of capital. For »any this could be an insurmountable 
barrier to entry. 

Prior to 1960, which would include the pre-electric 
as well as part of the electric era, there was absolutely 
no data available on which to draw any conclusions 
reqardinq the naqnitude of this barrier in relation to the 
typewriter industry. However the recent experience of 
*Olivetti*s purchase of Underwood has provided a good deal 
of insiqht into this particular barrier to entry. In an 
attempt to make the Onderwood company a viable and 
continuing participant in the typewriter business. Fortune 
Bagazine has indicated that Olivetti spent approximately 
J100 million. It has been estimated that "it costs up to 
$5 million lust to tool up for a new model, and up to S2 
million for model refinements." 16 This only refers to 
varying a model of the manual typewriter. 

Thus the data available indicate that all four of the 
above discussed factors represent entry barriers into the 
industry or a malor and increasing order of magnitude. 
This leaves one final aspect of the typewriter industry to 
be considered: the relationship between a market structure 
of oligopoly and market performance. 


7k 




E. Prof it Performance- Over Tine 

Economic theory suqqests that several relationships 
can exist betveen market structure and market perfornance. 
If an industry is a highly concentrated oligopoly with 
blocked entry, there is the possibility that large output 
restriction will exist with excess profits coninq from 
potential collusion. If this is also accompanied by 
product differentiation, one would expect to find product 
variations and a high level of sellinq costs which would 
‘result from intra-industry competition and the desire among 
existinq firms to maintain the barriers to entry. 

If the industry is highly concentrated, but with 
moderate entry, the above observations would hold except 
that the price charqed would be below that which induces 
entry in order to avoid aarket sharinq. And finally if the 
industry is heavily concentrated but with easy entry, there 
is no price to forestall entry. Trice will probably be 
increased, inducinq entry and thus chanqinq the industry's 
concentration. Accompanying this would be unstable 
markets, unstable prices and "periodic wastes of redundant 
capacity ." 1r 

It has already been established that the typewriter 
industry is a hiqhly concentrated industry and that the 
barriers to entry are indeed of considerable magnitude. 
Formally stated the second hypothesis to be tested herein 


73 



is that with a high degree of concentration and a hiqh 
level of barriers to entry, the typewriter industry would 
have output restrictions with excess profits possibly 
coainq from collusion. 

To test this hypothesis data were collected on the 
profit oarqins for the four magor typewriter manufacturers 
froa 1925 up to the tine that they merqed into conglomerate 
organizations. The profit margins were calculated for five 
year intervals with an industry averaqe also included. 
Table 1II-6 is a summary of profit rates on equity (after 
‘income taxes) for the four dominant firms in the typewriter 
industry during the years in which they were mainly engaged 
in typewriter production. The data for two time 
segments—1936-1940 and 1947-1951—were initally developed 
by Professor Bain. 

Profit marqins for the period 1936-1940 averaqed 
about 16 percent on net worth and for the period 1947-1951, 
about 18 percent. Shortly thereafter, however, the picture 
began to chanqe fundamentally. vhile concentration 
continued to be hiqh and, as conventionally measured, 
increased subsequent to 1951, profit marqins seriously 
deteriorated. For the first five year period following 
1951, the averaqe profit marqin for the firms declined to 
less than half the level it had achieved in the previous 
five year periods. Indeed, Underwood suffered a sliqht 
loss tor the period as a whole. Remington Rand’s profit 


76 



TABLE III-6 


PROFIT RATE ON E<3UITY (AFTER INCOME TAXES) FOR THE 
FOUR DOMINANT FIRMS IN THE TYPEWRITER INDUSTRY 


M 

M 



1921-25 


1930-34 

1932-36 

1936-UO 

191*7-51 

l4.8^ d) 

1957-61 

1962-66 

Renin gton-Rand 

2.8 

11.3 

1*9 , 

•3 

15.5 

22.7 

— 

— 

Royal 

7.7^ 

7-4 

1.5 

9.1 

23-9 

21.7 

11.5 

2.7 

4.4(e) 

Underwood 

9.6 {a) 

7A 

6.2 

8.4 

14.6 

14.4 

( .4) 

(58.6) 

... 

L.C. Smith 

N.A. 

8-5 (c > 

(I*.6) 

.1 

8.9 

13.0 

6.8 

, X W 

7 .8< h > 

Average 

(unweighted) 

6.7 

8.7 

1.0 

4.5 

15-7 

18.0 

8.2 

1.4 W 

0 a 

6.1 


(l8.6) (s > 


(«) 

1923-1925 

00 

1924-1925 

(c) 

1927-1929 

(d) 

1952-1955 

(e) 

1962-1964 

(D 

Without Undexvood 

(8) 

Includes Underwood 

00 

For SCM Corporation 


Source: (1936-40, 1947-51) Bain, Jo® S., Barrier® to Nev Competition (Cambridge: Harvard University 
Press, 1956) p. 192. " ' —-.™ - 


All other years, Moody's Industrial Survey 



■arqins held up fairly well, but those of the Royal 

Typewriter Company and L.C. Smith deteriorated 

substantially. 

The data for the next two five year periods requires 
some interpretation. The formation of Sperry Rand in 1955 

made it appropriate to eliminate Remington Rand as 

primarily a typewriter and office machine company. Royal 
continued as a separate company during the period 

1957-1961, but its profit ratio declined to almost zero, as 
was the case with L.C. Smith before its nerqer with 

'flarchant in 1958. The 1957-1961 period for Underwood was 
total disaster. On the averaqe, Underwood lost 58.6 

percent of its averaqe net worth durinq the period. This 
is an understatement because in the last several years of 
the period, Underwood suffered losses exceedinq its total 
net worth. This necessitated a restatement of debt claims 
on the company so that additional equity could be created 
in order to have a net equity balance before its 

acquisition by the Olivetti Company. 

Without Underwood, the profitability of the remaininq 
three companies durinq the period 1957-1961 was 1.4 percent 
on net worth. Includinq Underwood, the averaqe 
profitability was a loss of 18.6 percent on net worth. 
Obviously with such larqe loss fiqures, the precise 
profitability or precise loss measures are not meaninqful. 
Nevertheless, the picture is clear. Profitability had been 


78 



destroyed. For the regaining two. companies during portions 
of the 1962-1966 period, averaqe profitability was restored 
somewhat with the recovery of the SCK Corporation. The 
substantial number of acquisitions by SCK durinq the 
period, however, distorts its financial fiqures as 
representative of the typewriter business. 

The profit data are appropriate and highly 
significant fiqures for conpleting this chapter on the 
economic framework of the typewriter industry. Hany of the 
structural characteristics of the industry were unchanged 
•subsequent to 1951. nevertheless, profitability 
disappeared. It is important to note that the hypothesis 
developed herein is not valid when the industry is analyzed 
throuqh 1968. Hiqh seller concentration and high barriers 
to entry which would lead to excess profits and possible 
collusion was the hypothesis that best fit the typewriter 
industry, and it was partially substantiated by the profit 
data from 19.16 to 1951. Since 1951, the industry has been 
characterized as one with hiqh seller concentration and 
high barriers to entry, but not with excess profits. In 
fact, over a substantial number of those years, 
considerable losses were incurred as evidenced by the 
profit data in Table III-6. 

Previously it was mentioned that product 
differentiation was of a considerable magnitude in the 
typewriter industry and that the most important elements of 


79 



product differentiation were the aarketing, distribution 
and service organization. Because of their iaportance the 
next chapter will analyze these factors in depth. 


80 



footno tes to chapter iit 


1. Industry Profiles, 1958-1965 (Vashinqton: 0.S. 

Government Printing Office, B. D. S. A., 1966) p. 105. 


2. See Joe S. Bain, Barr iers to New Competition 
(Cambridge: Massachusetts: Harvard Oniversity Press, 1956) 

and bis Industrial Organization (Sew fork: John Viley & 
Sons, Inc., 1959 and 1968 Second Edition). 


3. Barriers to Sew Compet i tion , op. cit., p. 285. 


4. Ibid.. p. 3. 


5. Industrial O rganizatio n. op. cit .. p. 154. 


6. Barriers to Bow Compet i tion . op . cit., p. 107. 


7. Ibid-. P- 72. 


6* IM4-# P- 249. 


- 9- iMd-. P- 144. 


10. "Modernizing Fever Hits Typewriter Plants", Bus iness 
Keek (March 18, 1961) p. 130. 


11. C. F. Vouqh, "Competition and Rising Production Costs," 
.El2!?!!Sii2!l« (teceatcr 1961) p. 64. 


12. Craffey, J.J., editor, IP1 Sclectric Typewriter, A 
special report to ET Employees (New York: II’.R Corporation, 

July 31, 1961) p. 12. 


13. Leslie Hoffman, "Elininatinq Secondary Operations", 
IhC Tool £ Panu fact ur o Engineer. (August 1960) p. 35. 


8l 






14. Craffey, J.J. , loc. cit.. p. 22. 

15. Barriers to Sea Competition , op . cit.. p. 285. 

16. Bus iness Weet, op. cit., p. 127. 

17.Industrial Organization, op. cit., p. 35. 


82 



CHAPTEH IT 


THE BASKETING, DISTRIBUTION AND SERVICE 
ORGANIZATION IN THE TYPEWRITER INDUSTRY 


In the sale of a durable good of relatively high unit 
value, five factors are important in determining the market 
success of a product. These are: 

1. An effective aarketing organization 

2. An effective service organization 

3. Low maintenance costs 

4 . Perfornance of that product 

5. Price of the product 

This chapter focuses on the distribution system of 
typewriter companies. The distribution system is defined 
to consist of the marketing and service organization. The 
chapter takes the product and its characteristics as given 
and focuses on the role of the distribution system in 
deternining the effectiveness of a company's performance in 
the aarket place. 

The distribution systea for typewriters has been 
described as follows: 


Typewriters are sold through aanufacturers* 
branch sales offices, retail dealers, and 
consignment outlets. About 45 percent of 
domestically produced standard manual typewriters 
are sold through manufacturer's branch sales 
offices, 10 percent throuqh retail dealers, and 
35 percent through consignment outlets. 85 
percent of all standard electrics are sold 


83 



through manufacturers* branch sales offices and 
about 10 percent throuqh consignment outlets. 
Portables (manual and electric), on the other 
hand, are sold almost entirely throuqh retail 
dealers and increasingly throuqh volume 
retailers, such as department stores, discount 
houses, and credit jewelers. 1 


The basic channels of the distribution pattern for 
typewriters can be summarized in the following diagram. 


II £2 gntlet 

Standard Branches and direct 

Typewriters salesman; exclusive 

agents 

Detail dealers, especially 
volume retailers such as 
discount stores, department 
stores, and credit jewelers 

The interaction between product marketing and service 
is mutual and reinforcing. » qood product enables a firm 
to develop a strong marketing organization and provides 
financing for a strong service organization. Service 
expense on a qood product in turn will be relatively 
minimal if it is dosigned and manufactured soundly in the 


Portable 

Typewriters 



first place. This generalization was reflected in the 
analysis of the distribution structure. The doninant 
position of IBH is very clear. It has a total of 2,250 
direct salesmen, compared with under 1100 for all of the 
other companies combined.* Hith respect to its service 
organization IBH's position is even lore commanding. It 
has a total of 4,330 servicemen. This compares with a 
total of 2,448 for all of the other companies combined. 3 
Expressing these fiqures in percents, IBI1 with a 33.6 
percent share of the the typewriter market has 48.9 percent 
,of the industry’s salesmen and 56.5 percent of the 
industry's servicemen. This would indicate that IBM has a 
much greater density factory in terms of sales and service 
than the other typewriter manufacturers. The advantages of 
a hiqh density factor are discussed in the next section. 

Thus there is an interacting relationship between the 
service organization and the effectiveness of the marketing 
and distribution system. k product which has a low 
•aintenance expense to start with and which involves a 
minimum of servicing tine and expense provides the kind of 
performance that enables it to develop an iaaqe which 
constitutes an increasing barrier to entry. 

. *• Reinfo rcem ent of narkcting and Service Organizations 

Vhen this kind of combined advantage is reinforced by 


8 i 



the availability of a service organization which promptly 
and on the customer’s premises performs both preventive 
maintenance and restores units to operations, marketing 
effectiveness is reinforced to a high degree. Hith a 
product with minimal maintenance expenses, service 
contracts can be sold on very attractive terns. This also 
keeps the resale value of the unit relatively high. Thus 
the initial product can be sold at a price higher than the 
prices of competing products yet the total cost of using 
the item can be shown to be significantly lower despite 
.substantially higher initial cost. 

This last point is exemplified by looking at today’s 
market. In terms of a price comparison on comparable lines 
of office electric typewriters, IBH leads the field with 
Boyal a close second. However IBH which has the highest 
price line of typewriters also has the largest share of the 
office electric market — approximately 60 percent. This 
would indicate that the initial purchase price is not 
always the most important factor in the purchase of 
electric typewriters. Factors such as a strong product — 
infrequent breakdowns —, a rapid and effective service 
organization, and the ability to provide needed maintenance 
at a low cost provides IBH with a product that has a higher 
initial cost but undoubtedly a lower total cost compared to 
the other manufacturers. This has resulted in IBH's 
dominance of both the office electric typewriter market and 


86 



the total typewriter market. 

The reinforcing effects are fnrther magnified in a 
nowher of other ways. The aarket share of a successful 
coopany is large and continues to increase. The larga 
Market share provides the company with a customer density 
for holding down both its Marketing and its service costs. 
In addition, with a high density of both sales and the 
stock of Machines in use, the coapany can concentrate its 
Marketing efforts in snaller geographical segments. By 
being able to sell service contracts on a relatively 
.inexpensive basis the serviceman can call upon the customer 
and if trained appropriately he can perform a considerable 
positive Marketing effort during these frequent contacts. 
This also aakes it possible for such a company to achieve 
coaprehensive Market coverage. By reducing the area of its 
salesmen and the qeographic area of responsibility of 
coverage of its servicemen it becomes increasingly 
profitable for the company to handle small accounts. The 
incentives work with converging effect. Because the 
salesman's territory is smaller he must give attention to 
the smaller accounts to maintain his volume. Because the 
area he covers is smaller, the time involved in making 
these additional contacts is shorter and therefore can be 
profitable, hll of this is reinforced by the image of a 
successful product and the actual effective perfornance. 

What is significant here is that the reinforcement of 


87 



a good product by the growing strength of a marketing and 
service organization not only increases the barriers to 
entry of a potential new firs, but makes it increasingly 
difficult for other firms to aaintain their position in the 
industry. Thus one has a clear illustration of market 
processes that tend toward creation of a dominant firm in a 
aarket structure of existing partial monopoly, virtual 
complete market control in an economic'sense. The economic 
and business advantages of the dominant firn become so 
great that the ability of competing firms or potential new 
'entrants to obtain a share of the market is substantially 
reduced. These factors help reinforce the degree of 
concentration that exists in the typewriter industry today. 

The reinforcement operates in the opposite direction 
for the smaller firms. The success of the product of the 
dominant fira is reinforced by the strength of its 
Marketing and service organization. It becomes difficult 
to aaintain salesaen and servicemen in firms whose market 
shares are small and declining. The coepensation to 
salesmen and servicemen in the dominant firms makes the 
productivity of the salesaen and servicemen substantially 
kiqher than their counter parts in the less successful 
firms. Therefore, the marketing and service organizations 
of the less successful firms progressively deteriorate. 
Thus any product advantage of the more successful fira is 
reinforced by significant advantages in the resulting 


88 



marketing and service organization. These market processes 
illumine and reemphasize some of the judgements made about 
the typewriter industry during the pre-electric era. 4 

The Olivetti-Underwood experience is a prime example 
of what can happen to a company's sales and distribution 
system when their market position deteriorates.Olivetti had 
purchased Underwood for the reasons discussed in the next 
section. But what they found was a decaying marketing and 
distribution system which was the direct result of a 
decaying market position in the typewriter industry. 

In the years prior to 1962, competition had displaced 
Underwood products in many offices of the larger 
corporations in the United States. Thus after the purchase 
br Olivetti, the whole Underwood organization had to be 
revamped. In 1961 there were 2,000 large corporations 
selected for special attention. Experienced salesmen of 
Underwood and Olivetti products approached these national 
accounts in special sales efforts. In addition special 
national account business shows were presented in 30 major 
cities throughout the United States.* The purpose of the 
concentrated sales program was to prove the usefulness of 
Olivetti-Undervood products to these large corporations and 
from there expand to the rest of the nation using the 2,000 
corporations as a testimonial. Underwood has been 
successful in this approach. 

The rest of the marketing and distribution 


8 9 



organization was also drastically altered. The sales 
efforts of calculators and typewriters were combined. At 
the beginning of 1962 branch operations were staffed with 
new nen with little experience in the sale of Olivetti or 
Underwood products. Branch operations were established in 
125 of the largest cities in the United States. Prior to 
1962, the branch manager's duties were split between 
nanaqing the sales for his branch and aanaging the sales 
for various agents. This was chanqed so that the agents 
had direct contact with the home office. In addition, all 
other functions except sales were removed from the hands of 
the branch manager. 

The aqency division was established with 1100 
positions to be filled. Of those hired, 50 percent were 
former Underwood or Olivetti agents or dealers. Each agent 
would have exclusive rights to the Underwood-Olivetti 
products. 6 

Thus Olivetti, which originally purchased Underwood 
for its marketing and distribution system had to invest a 
larqe sum of money to completely revise that system. This 
was partially the result of a deterioration in the 
marketing and distribution system at Underwood. 

B. JSaxkeiing ffoblems facLng a Pgrejga «anu£actu£e£ 

The situation of foreign manufacture in the 


90 



typewriter industry as a potential entrant is of special 
interest in Tie* of the characteristics of the distribution 
system in the typewriter industry. The foreign producer 
faces a significant strategic policy question as he 
contemplates attempting to enter the U.S. market. One 
alternative that will contribute to his long term success 
is the development of his own marketing organization. The 
cost of developing his own marketing organization through 
his own branches and direct sales and service organization 
is indeed substantial. As indicated before, if a 
manufacturer seeks national coverage, not only are the 
expenses of establishing a marketing organization large, 
but subsequent operating costs would represent a continuous 
heavy burden. The reason for this is that if a firm 
develops a national organization initially, the density 
factor in terms of volume per branch or individual salesman 
is so small that these direct costs charged against unit 
sales bear a much higher percentage of the sales dollar 
than would be the case for an existing manufacturer with 
already large volume. 

An indication of the magnitude of these costs is 
suggested by Olivetti's experience with Underwood. A 
stronq motivation on the part of Olivetti for developing a 
relationship with Underwood was to utilize its larqa 
■arketinq organization in the United States. It wa3 hoped 
that this would provide a basis for a stronq entry of 


91 



Olivetti prodacts into the United States. Yet, in 

attempting to deal with the problems which Underwood faced, 
»>y the end of 1962 Olivetti had invested some $60-65 
■illion seekinq to rehabilitate Underwood's sales 
organization. 7 Thus the one strategy of developing its own 
direct sales organization involved a very large outlay of 
capital. If the Olivetti-Underwood experience is any 

guide, the outlay of capital would have to be in the range 
of $75 - 100 million for establishing the framework of a 

sales organization. This does not cover the annual 
^operating losses that would result from the incomplete 
utilization of such a large organization. Hence, a firm 
■ust consider the other alternative. 

The other alternative for the foreign manufacturer 
seeking an entry into the U.S. domestic market is to 
utilize the established independent dealers for standard 
typewriters and to use the mass marketing outlets for 
portables. This indicates why the foreign firms have been 
uuch aore successful in penetrating the portable market 
than the standard aarket, particularly the standard 
olectric aarket. The portables, particularly the low price 
line, can be sold to discount houses, department stores and 
other aass retail merchandising outlets. k minimal 
marketing organization owned and controlled by the 
manufacturing company is required. 

On the other hand the distribution systen for 


92 



standard typewriters, electric or manual, is much 
different, is indicated, the dominant method of selling 
the standard typewriters is through the coapany*s own sales 
organization, consisting of branches and direct salesaen. 
Indeed, approximately 80-90 percent of standard typewriters 
are sold through this system. 8 Thus the independent dealer 
accounts for about 10-20 percent of this market. The 
fundanental handicap faced by the independent dealer is 
that his operation is basically local in its nature. It 
cowers a United area within a city or, if the independent 
,dealer has a strong delivery organization bached up by 
substantial advertising, it nay cover an entire 
■etropolitan area. The big volume of sales is made to 
national organizations with locations throughout the United 
States. In order to effectively sell and service such an 
account, a national marketing and servicing organization 
under the control of the nanufacturer is essential. 

Thus for a given foreign country which seeks to nake 
a penetration into the U.S. market, the choice of the 
second strategy of using independent dealers imposes a 
limited share of the market in advance. Since independent 
dealers as a whole account for only 10-20 percent of the 
standard typewriter market it is clear that a given foreign 
manufacturer will be unable to obtain the effective 
services of all of the independent dealers. In addition, 
the dealers sell a number of lines a3 well. Thus if a 


93 



given foreign nanafacturer obtains as high a proportion as 
50 percent of the dealers, and obtains 25 percent on the 
average of their volume, the market share of the typewriter 
field that would be achieved by that foreign company would 
be at nost one-half times one fourth of 20 percent or 2.5 
percent of the total market. Adler Typewriter Company of 
Germany is a good example of this situation. Having 
achieved 2.5 percent of the O.S. market through the use of 
independent dealers, the company has reached about the 
maximum market share under this type of marketing system. 

However, developing a good relationship with a group 
of independent dealers may pose problems for the 
development of the sales of the foreign manufacturers* 
portable typewriters. To develop a relationship with 
dealers generally requires that the dealers receive 
exclusive rights to sell the foreign manufacturer's total 
line of products in a given local area. But the effective 
marketing channel for the relatively small unit value of 
portable typewriters is the mass retailer aarket consisting 
of nail order houses, other types of department stores and 
discount houses. Dealers are an ineffective outlet for the 
foreiqn manufacturer's portables, but if he attempts to 
market his standard typewriters through the independent 
dealers and his portables through the mass merchandising 
retailers, he will incur the ill-will of the dealers and 
cause a deterioration in the effectiveness of the dealer 


94 



organization for handling the sales of bis standard 

typewriters. 

One exception is with Olivetti-Underwood where the 
portable line of products are sold to 4,000 outlets in 
addition to the branch and agency organization. When the 
products are sold to dealers, they are sold on a 
non-exclusive basis. But again, this nay show the 
advantage of a foreign nanufacturer acquiring a domestic 
producer such as Ondervood. 

Thus for analysis of the economic processes and the 
^nature of competition in the typewriter market, the 
marketing and service organization seem to be of critical 
significance. They interact with the product performance, 
with its level of maintenance costs. Any advantage in 
quality of products measured by performance or the low 
level of maintenance costs is reinforced by the 
effectiveness of the marketing and servicing organization. 
Thus any large difference in market share in the present 
typewriter industry is likely to be reinforced and lead 
cumulatively in the direction of increased market dominance 
by a single firm. 

C. Changes ifi tfce-Typewriter Ind ustry 

The situation described is more applicable to the 
characteristics of the typewriter market today than in the 


95 



decades when the manual typewriter predominated. In that 
era, ther were no fundamental differences between the 
manual typewriters and as a consequence the market shares 
of the dominant biq four firms were rouqhly equal. This 
enabled each firm to achieve the desired economies of 
scale. The product differentiation emphasis on different 
elements of desiqn and appearance was reinforced by 
advertisinq. The related marketing and service 
organizations of the four major companies were of about 
egual strength. If one typewriter company moved ahead in 
.terms of a particular desiqn or feature which provided it 
with an advantage, the advantage was likely to prove 
temporary. It was followed quickly by imitation of success 
by the rival companies. As a consequence, the biq four 
companies maintained rouqhly equal market shares, while it 
was difficult for other companies, including the foreiqn 
manufacturers, to enter the market. 

A fundamental trend which took place at this time was 
the broadeninq acceptance of IBH standard electric 
typewriter. The sales of manual typewriters began to 
decline. In the standard typewriter field particularly the 
traditional American typewriter companies had lagged in 
introducing an effective electric typewriter. Attempts had 
been made to introduce electric typewriters, but they were 
not successful until IBS made a successful market 
penetration. However, with the increased penetration by 



both foreign manufacture and by IBB with its electric 
typewriter, the nature of the economic processes in the 
industry have fundamentally changed. 

With regard to the IBB electric typewriter, the 
ability to iaitate this type of product involves huge 
capital outlays with qreat uncertainties. The tiae lag 
gives an advantage of developing a Marketing and servicing 
organization so strong as to aake the probability of 
success for a competing product by one of the existing old 
line American typewriter manufacturing companies relatively 
t small. These prospects narrow the range of viability of 
domestic manufacturing activity. Instead of a tendency 
toward relatively egual market shares as existed 
pre-effective foreiqn competition and pre-lBH electric, the 
tendency now is for any market share advantage to be 
self-reinforcinq and tend toward the emergence of a single 
dominant firm in a given line of business. Any comparative 
advantage through marketing organization and product image 
which may have been possessed by the original American 
manufacturers of typewriters has either been destroyed or 
is being subject to very rapid erosion. 

The major problems facing a foreign manufacturer 
seeking to penetrate the American market prevents any 
individual foreiqn manufacturer form obtaining a 
substantial share of the D.S. market. The limited success 
of foreign manufacturers is related to particular segments 


97 



of the aanual typewriter market. In addition, the types of 
Marketing strategies that have to be employed in order to 
carte ont segaents of the market east be analyzed in 
soaevhat qreater detail in order to understand the role of 
foreiqn competition in the U.S. typewriter market. A more 
detailed explanation of that role and its nature is 
therefore the subject of the following chapter on the 
impact of foreiqn competition. 


98 



FOOTNOTES TO CHAPTER IV 


1. United Sta tes Typewriter Industry, Analysis and 
Trends, 1958-1966 . (Washinqton, D.C.: United States 

Department of Commerce / Business S Defense Services 
Administration, July 1967) p. 1. 


2. Testimony before the FTC in the application of Litton 
Industries to nerqe with Triumph-Adler of Germany, April 

10, 1969. 


3. Ibi d. 


, 4. See Barr iers to Competition . "The primary basis of 
differentiation seems to lie in product reputations and 
particularly in customer service (involvinq repair, 
■aintenance, inspection, etc.) built around established 
chains of dealers." p. 285 


5. Olivetti-Onderwood. An nual Report . 1962. 


6. JMi. 


7. "Onderwood Fiqhts Its Way Back," Business Week. 
December 30, 1962, pp. 42. 


8. SBited-States Typewriter Industry. Anal ysis and Trends. 
1956-1 966. (Washinqton, D.C.: United States Department of 
Commerce/ Business C Defense Services Administration, July 

1967) p. 1. 


99 


CHAPTER T 


TEE IHPACT OF FOREIGH COMPETITION OH 
THE O.S. TYPEWRITER I5D0STBY 


The iapact of foreiqn cospetition has been varied in 
its nature and not uni-dinensional - in its impact. The 
nature and iapact of the several aspects of foraiqn 
competition will be analyzed under the followinq topics: 

A. Tariff history 

B. Data trends 

C. Hanufacturinq abroad by D.S. companies 

D. Cost cooparisons 

E. Market share considerations 

A. Brief Resume of Tariff History 

In the Tariff Act of 1909 a 30 percent ad valorem 
tariff vas applied to the importation of typewriters in the 
United States.* In the revision of the tariff under the 
Tariff Act of 1913 typewriters were placed on the free list 
3 and the Tariff Act of 1930, * typewriters remained on the 
free list. 

In the late 1990's extended discussions between the 
United States and other countries took place in scekinq to 
liberalize tariff policies and seekinq a qeneral reduction 


100 




in tariffs. The duty-free status of typewriter inports 
into the United States became fully "bound" by the General 
Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT) effective on June 

6 . 1951. 

The contrast in tariffs on D.S. exports of 
typewriters into foreign countries has generally remained. 
The tariffs on the import of U.S. typewriters into European 
Connon Earket countries would average in the ranqe of a 
10.h percent ad valorem tariff. Thus a lack of symmetry 
developed in the tariff arrangements on typewriters between 
'the U.S. and other countries. 

The impact of changing the tariff status of imports 
of typewriters and parts into the United states to the 
United States by the General Agreement on Tariff and Trade, 
effective June 6,1951, introduced greater certainty in 
planning for foreign manufacturers. Outlays for the 
development of organizations to export typewriters into the 
United States could be based on a greater certainty that 
the tariff status of typewriters would not bo changed in a 
short period of time. It provided the foreign 
manufacturers with a basis for expectation of a sustained 
period of time in which the use of distribution and 
marketing organizations would receive a return. 

This change was taken in conjunction with other 
developments in European production. After World War II 
typewriter plants in both Vest Germany and Italy were 


101 



rebuilt with facilities with the latest and Best modern 
technology. 

Rith the advent of the common market development in 
Europe and the achievement of larger economic units, 
European companies beqan to operate in enlarqed markets. 
This provided the European companies with two advantages. 
One was that the European companies had always emphasized 
technical advance with the purpose of carving out 
proprietory seqnents of relatively small markets. The 
economics of the type of industry in which they operated 
•placed great pressures on effective research and 
development organizations. This was coupled with the 
second advantage of lower waqe costs. With the development 
of larqer economic markets the foreign manufacturer was 
able to enlarqe his scale of operations and reach volumes 
which enabled the foreiqn manufacturer to compete more 
equally on a product cost and price basis in the U.S. 
market. 

E. Irends ifl World Tr ade ij] T ype writers 

The impact of the foroqoinq economic developments was 
substantial. It may best be measured by an analysis of 
patterns of U.S. imports to U.S. exports of typewriters. 
This is best portrayed by the data of Fiqure V-1. The 
figure sets forth the ratio of the U.S. portion of imports 


102 



FIGURE Y-l 



103 



FIGURE V-l 
(Continued) 


Source: These data were developed from the two foreign 
trade series published by the U.S. Department 
of Commerce. FT 135 is for U.S. imports. FT 410 
is for U.S. exports. (Washington; D.C.: U.S. 
Department of Commerce, Bureau of the Census) 
monthly publications 1948 through December 1967. 


lo4 



to exports of typewriters for the period 1948-1967. The 
data used in the construction of this figure is presented 
in the Appendix.Inports into the United States in 1948 
represented 4 percent of U.S. exports of typewriters and 
parts. However, by 1966 the ratio had risen to 176 percent. 

The change is even more dramatic when analyzed into 
typewriter parts versus complete typewriters. For 
typewriter parts the ratio rose from less than 1 percent to 
5 percent by the early 1950's after which it remained 
relatively stable at that level. However, for complete 
typewriters the ratio of imports to exports which was as 
low as 4 percent in 1948 rose to 296 percent by 1966. 

Before World War II the U.S. dominated foreign trade 
in typewriters, accounting for as much as 65 percent of the 
vorld market. World War II disrupted trade, including that 
of typewriters. However, by the late 1940's the United 
States had regained its lost markets. Between 1948 and 
1957, the U.S. share of the world market declined from 
approximately 63 percent to 9 percent. In the last decade, 
the U.S. share of the world trade in typewriters has 
fluctuated in the range of around 10 percent. 5 

It may be noted, however, that exports of typewriters 
and parts increased in absolute terms between 1950 and 
1966. Exports of typewriters and parts increased from $15 
million in 1958 to $34 million in 1966. The export of 
specialized and electric typewriters accounted for 


103 



approximately half of the increase. But even more dramatic 
was the increase in the export of typewriter parts 
reflecting the qrowinq practice of producing typewriters in 
U.S. subsidaries overseas. Exports of typewriter parts 
grew from S7 Billion in 1958 to $14 willion in 1966. 

Bhile the exports of typewriters and parts increased 
in absolute teres, the imports of typewriters and parts 
increased even tore qreatly, resulting in the rising ratios 
of imports and exports as set forth in Figure V-1. 

Table V-1 indicates that in recent years U.S. net 
'production, defined as U.S. production less exports, was 
approximately 85 percent of U.S. consumption.If U.S. 
production, without deducting exports, is related to U.S. 
consumption, the relationship rises to almost 95 percent. 
But these figures understate the impact of foreiqn 
competition on the U.S. typewriter industry. This is 
because the great impact on the trends referred to above 
has been on the shift of the manufacturing of a large 
number of typewriter lines by all U.S. companies to plants 
overseas — mainly in western European countries. 

nevertheless, with U.S. production such a high 
percentage of U.S. consunption, the question may be raised 
as to whether the impact has been sufficiently great to 
cause the concern which has frequently been expressed. The 
impact has been qreat for the following reasons: First, the 
impact of increased imports from foreign manufacturers has 


106 



U.S. POSITION IN W3RID PRODUCTION OP TYPEWRITERS, 1965 , 1966 
(Dollar Amounts In Thousands) 


Tear 

Consumption 

(a) 

Net Production 

(b) 

Percent of 

U.S. Net Pro¬ 
duction to U.S. 
Consirrption 

Percent of 

U.S. Gross 
Production to 
U.S. Consumption 

1967 ' 

$510,888 

$448,963 

87.9 

95.2 

1966 

448,836 

387,562 

86.7 

94.3 

1965 

334,270 

286,780 

85.8 

95.0 


(a) Consumption is defined as total U.S Production (Including parts) plus total U.S. 
Imports less U.S. exports. 

(b) Net Production Is total production less U.S. exports. 


Source: FT 135 reports for U.S. Imports. FT 410 reports for U.S. exports. (Washington, D.C.t 
U.S. Department of Commerce, Bureau of the Census) monthly publications. 

Facts for Industry, Series M35C (Washington, D.C.: U.S, Department of Commerce: Bureau of 
the Census) monthly publications. 



essentially removed an important element of qrovth in the 
domestic manufacture of typewriters. Second, it came at a 
time when the growth element in manual typewriters was 
already removed by the development of electric typewriters 
so that in individual manufacturing plants for manual 
typewriters in the O.S. downward trends in absolute terms 
developed. Third, in the low-price portable seqment of the 
market particularly, the share of the foreiqn producers has 
been very substantial. Fourth, these trends have been 
sufficient to result in excess capacity in a large number 
"of the manufacturers* plants of domestic producers. As a 
consequence, capacity utilization has dropped to the range 
of 55-65 percent for domestic manufacturers. Such a 
decline in capacity has been sufficient to wipe out 
favorable profit marqins and result in substantial losses 
for domestic manufacturers. 

C. Man ufacturing Operat ion s Abroad by Typewriter 

Comp anies 

One of the naior influences on the world development 
of the typewriter industry was a shift of production from 
the Dnitcd States to European countries. This was a major 
factor in the decline of the U.S. exports of typewriters 
and also in the increase of U.S. exports cf parts. Belorn 
1955 typewriters were not produced in largo quantities in 


108 





the European countries and D.S. model typewriters were 
produced in insignificant quantities. A decade later, at 
the end of 1958, each of the U.S. firms which were major 
producers of typewriters were conducting typewriter 
production operations in one or more of the European 
countries. 

The impact of European production was seriously being 
felt by 1960. Imports of the low-cost portables continued 
to increase and absorb a larqe share of the domestic 
market. Profit margins were being lowered throughout the 
'typewriter industry as domestic producers tried to maintain 
their position in the industry. An example of a company 
trying to strengthen its position in competing with the low 
cost portables was SCfi, which decided to transfer 
production of the Skyriter to its subsidary in Enqland. 
This move was aimed at cutting production costs and 
improving their competitive position in the low-priced 
portable market. 6 

The situation was dramatized even more by an article 
in Financial World which stated: 

American typewriter markers are waging a 
vigorous counter-attack on several fronts against 
foreign imports. Production facilities have been 
regrouped, product lines have been revamped and 
sales forces reorganized, all as part of the 
grand strategy. Success in this campaign could 
bring a sharp earnings recovery for those U.S. 
tiros that have been hit hardest by competition 
from abroad. 7 


109 



The year 1960 was an excellent one for the typewriter 
industry as far as sales were concerned. Unit volume rose 
fros 1.7 million to 1.8 Billion. This matched the record 
■ade in 1957 when 1.84 Billion typewriters were sold. 
However, the picture was quite different on the earninqs 
side. Rost firms were heavily burdened with the defense 
aqainst cheap imports and their profit picture reflected 
this fact. In the case of SCR and Underwood, substantial 
losses were incurred. 8 

Thus several conpanies were shiftinq production of 
*tbeir typewriters to overseas plants. Sperry-Rand at that 
tine noved all its U.S. production of non-electric office 
and portable machines to Europe. The portable line was 
shifted for reasons of lower production costs abroad, while 
the office non-electric shift was due to decreasinq sales 
in the O.S. and increasinq sales abroad. SCR and 
Royal-BcBee had already shifted production of their low 
priced portables from the U.S. to Europe.’ 

The factors brinq about this fundamental 
transformation in this aspect of the international 
typewriter market were varied but conpellinq. First, 
production costs had qenerally been lower in Europe. This 
situation has , of course, existed for somo time and 
therefore some additional influences wore required to cause 
the fundaBontal chanqe in the investment policy that took 
place. 


110 



Second, this advantage of lover production cost beqan 
to be increasingly felt in the U.S. Growing competition 
from the European producers was experienced both in the 
U.S. domestic market and in non-European markets where O.S. 
firms had made a beginning and hoped to expand their volume 
of sales. 

Third, in 1948 the European regional economic 
organization had been organized.The European Economic 
Community (EEC) was established including France, West 
German, Italy, Netherlands, Belgium and Luxembourg. The 
'European Free Trade Association (EFTA) was also established 
including the United Kingdom, Denmark, Greece, Norway, 
Austria, Ireland, Sweden, Switzerland, and Spain. In 
addition, in 1948, the Organization for European Economic 
Cooperation ( OEEC) was established comprising 18 
countries. These included Austria, Belgium, Denmark, 
Prance, West Germany, Greece, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, 
Luxembourg, The Netherlands, Norway, Portugal, Sweden, 
Switzerland, Trieste, Turkey, and the United KinqdoD. All 
of these countries subscribed to the provisions on the 
General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT) and six of 
the countries representing the European Coal and Steel 
Community. 

The establishment of reqional economic qroups in 
Europe had qreat significance. It provided both 
opportunities and threats. The opportunities were 


111 



represented by a combined population almost one-third 
qreater than that of the O.S., with a qross national 
product approximately equal to that of the O.S. The 
tariffs and other trade requlations in foreiqn exchanqe 
controls made it clear that there would be distinct 
advantaqes to locatinq within these reqional groups, which 
would be raisinq economic boundaries of various types. 

k fourth and related factor also represented an 
advantaqe of locatinq in European countries. By so doinq 
the O.S. firms increased their opportunities for exportinq 
'from Europe to dollar shortaqe areas of the world with 
European currency credits. 

Perhaps none of these influences alone could have 
played the dooinant role in causinq the massive shift of 
production from the O.S. to European countries. However, 
taken in conlunction, their influence was overwhelainq. As 
a consequence, the year 1950 represented a significant 
change in the O.S. position and the international 
typewriter market. For the first time the value of imports 
of typewriters and parts of approximately S20 nillion, 
exceeded the value of exports of typewriters and parts from 
the O.S. of approximately $15 million. Parts, which had 
accounted for only 9 percent of O.S. exports in 19*»8, 
accounted for almost 50 percent of the total value of O.S. 
exports of typewriters and parts in 1908.** The decline in 
the O.S. oxports of typewriters and parts amounted to 


112 



approxinately $27 Billion, aluost double the $15 Billion 
exports in 1958. 

The extend of the inpact of the novenent of portable 
typewriter nanufacturinq operations by U.S. coepanies 
abroad is shown by the data in Table V-2. Bote that all of 
the low-priced aodels of portable typewriters are produced 
abroad. 

Another aspect in the analysis of the inpact of 
foreiqn competition is the quality ratinq of foreign 
produced portables in relation to the portables produced by 
'0.S. nanufacturers. In Chapter III it was ventioned that 
outside of SCH, Remington,Royal and Olivetti-Underwood 
other nanufacturers account for 17.6 percent of the D.S. 
aarket. When this is related to the ratinqs of portable 
typewriters by consumer report bulletins, some interesting 
conclusions can be drawn. Tables V-3 and V-4 present the 
ratinqs of portable typewriters by consumer report 
bulletins for the years 1960 and 1966. In 1960, 26 
portable typewriters were selected by Consumer Reports 
Haqa 2 lne for analysis. Of these 65.3 percent were 
produced outside the U.S. and 15.4 percent produced inside 
the U.S. The rest were unknown in oriqin of production. 
In the heavyweiqht cateqory there was no U.S. produced 
nachine or U.S. nachino nanufacturcd abroad which received 
an excellent ratinq. In the very qood category two out of 
the throe wore produced in the U.S. And in the good 


U3 




PATTERN OF LOCATION OF MANUFACTURERS OF 
TYPEWRITERS ABROAD 


Portable Typewriters 


Model 
Royal Royalite 
Smith Corona Skyrlter 
Hermes Rocket 
Olympia SF 
Olivetti Lettera 22 
Remington Travel Rlter 
Underwood Leader 
Arrtarea Parva 
Peerless 


Country of Origin 
The Netherlands (Tr. 122) 
Great Britain (Tr. 121) 
Switzerland (Tr. 120) 
West Germany (Tr. 121) 
Italy (Tr. 120) 

Abroad (Tr. 103-104) 
Abroad (Tr. 55) 

Italy (Tr. 120) 

Japan (Tr. 119) 


(Tr. 16) 


Intermediate Price Range Portable Typewriters 
Diana-Royal McBee Die Netherlands 


All models except: Abroad 

Royal Futura 400 U.S. 

Smith-Corona line U.S. 

Hi flier Price I?on-electrlc Portable Typewriters 

Smith-Corona Silent-Super U.S. 

(since superseded by Galaxle) 

Royal Futura 800 UJ3. 


All other models 


Abroad 


TABLE V-2 
(continued) 


Source: The information in Table V-3 vas compiled from the tran¬ 
script in a Application for an Escape-Clause investigation 
under Section 7 of the Trade Agreements Extension Act of 1951 
as arended. The Application vas prompted by the fact that 
I typevriters vere imported to the U.S. duty free, -whereas 

American manufacturers faced both tariff barriers and quotas 
dr other regulatory restrictions on inports into foreign 
countries. The applications -were opposed to the "imposition 
of any quota on the value or units of typevriters -which nay 
be imported into the United States". The Tariff Commission 
•was requested to re commend the imposition of a tariff on the 
importation of typevriters to "compensate for the dual 
advantabe of the lower manufacturing costs and tariff pro- 
“ tection employed by typewriter producers in other countries. 
See United States Tariff Commission, Typewriters Application 
far Escape-Clause Investigation under Section 7 of the Trade 
Agr e ements Extension Act of 1951 as amended, i 960 , pp. 39-**0> 
P. 57- 





TABLE V-3 




RATINGS OF PORTABLE TYPEWRITERS, i960 


15-23 lb* Model - 


Price 


Acceptable — Excellent 




Hermes 3 000 

17 lb. 

$125 

Switzerland 

Olympia SM4 

21 lb. 

120 

W. Germany 

Acceptable — Very Good 




Faclt TP1-K3 

19 lb. 

110 

Sweden 

Sears Tower President XU 

19 lb. 

115 

U.S.A. 

Smith-Corona Galaxie 

17 lb. 

142 

U.S.A. 

Acceptable — Good 




Alder Prims 

18 lb. 

130 

W. Germany 

Imperial Deluxe 5 

15 lb. 

125 

Britain 

Torpedo 18b 

19 lb 

110 

Rem.Rand (Germany) 

Underwood-Olivetti Studio 44 

20 lb. 

120 

Spain 

Acceptable — Fair 




Alpina Model Sk24 

23 lb. 

110 

E. Germany 

AIC Sk24 

23 lb. 

100 

NA 

Remington Ouiet-Riter Eleven 

21 lb. 

138 

Abroad 

Royal Futura 600 

18 lb. 

136 

U.S.A. 

Wards Royal Eeritage 

18 lb. 

90 

NA 

Acceptable — Poor 




Consul Deluxe 

20 lb. 

85 

Japan 

Remington Travel-Riter 

16 lb. 

86 

Abroad 


8-13 lb . 


Acceptable — Good 


Olympia SFS 

11 lb. 

70 

W. Germany 

Underwood-Olivetti Letters 22 

11 lb. 

88 

Italy 

Hermes Rochet 

8 lb. 

75 

Switzerland 


116 



TABLE V-3 (continued) 


8-13 lb.' Model 

Weight 

Price ' 

Country of Origin 

Acceptable — Flair 




/AFC 

13 Xb. 

$ 60 

HA 

Cole Steel 

11 lb. 

95 

11A 

Royal Royalite 

10 lb. 

50 

Holland 

oears Tover Chieftain HI 

10 lb. 

50 

HA 

fort th -Corona Skywriter 

10 lb. 

75 

Britain 

Wards Royal Dart 

10 lb. 

U6 

HA 

Antares Domus 

10 lb. 

90 

Italy 


(SA) -- Data not available 

Source: Consuaer Report (l.'ovenber i960) pp. 571, 572. 


117 



TABLE V-4 


RATINGS OF PORTABLE TYPEWRITERS, 1966 


Model 

Weight 

Price 

Country of Origin 

( Acceptable — Excellent 

Olympia SM-9 10" carriage 

21 lb. 

$120 

V. Germany 

Olympia SM-9 13" carriage 

25 lb. 

140 

V. Germany 

Saith-Corona Classic 12 

20 lb. 

128 

U.S.A. 

Sears Forecast 12 

20 lb. 

114 

U.S.A. 

Hermes 3°0O 

17 lb. 

130 

Switzerland 

Acceptable — Very Good 

Wards Signature 510 

20 lb. 

89 

Japan 

Wards Signature 513 

21 lb. 

99 

Japan 

find.th-Corona Sterling .. > 

18 lb. 

108 

02-A. 

Royal Safari 

18 lb. 

no 

U.S.A. 

Facit TP2 

18 lb. 

119 

Sweden 

Brother Deluxe 900 

20 lb. 

120(est.) 

Japan 

Brother Deluxe 905 

21 lb. 

130 

Japan 

Acceptable — Good 

Olympia SF Deluxe 

12 lb. 

79 

V. Germany 

Wards Signature 44OT 

15 lb. 

68 

Japan 

Olivetti-Underwood Studio 44 

' 21 lb. 

100 

Spain 

Olivetti-Undervood 21 

22 lb. 

105 

Italy 

Remington Mark 11 

21 lb. 

125 

Eolland 

Olivetti Underwood Letters 32 12 lb. 

70 

Italy 

Remington Ten Forty 

15 lb. 

87 

Eolland 

Acceptable -- Fair to Poor 

Brother Deluxe 885 

11 lb. 

70 

Japan 

Remington Streamliner 

13 lb. 

58 

Holland 

Sears Attache 

15 lb. 

53 

HA 

Hermes Rocket 

9 lb. 

55 

Switzerland 

Smith-Corona Corsair 

10 lb. 

57 

U.S.A. 

Royal Skylark 

13 lb. 

68 

ffnlInnd 


Source: Consumer Report (November 1966) pp. 527/ 523• 


118 



cateqory all were foreign machines. In the liqhtveight 
cateqory no machine received a rating of very good or 
excellent and no O.S. manufactured machine received a 
ratinq of qood. Thus one would conclude, as did the 
consumer report, that the best portable typewriter to buy 
— based upon their testing criteria — would be a foreiqn 
produced machine. If in the future these tests reflected 
the sane basic results and the buying public continued to 
take the advice of consumer report, then the market shares 
of the O.S. typewriter manufacturers in the portable 
‘typewriter lino would further deteriorate with the market 
share of the foreign manufacturers continuing to increase. 
Thus the possibility that the O.S. domestic typewriter 
industry would continue to be heavily concentrated with one 
firm dominating the market would indeed be great. 

When the year 1966 was examined, similar results were 
obtained.* 2 Out of the 25 machines analyzed, 76 percent 
were known to be produced outside the O.S. while the rest 
were produced inside the U.S. The machine recommended by 
Consumer Report would be a foreiqn machine. In the 
excellent category 60 percent of the machines were 
completely foreiqn machines. In the very good cateqory 71 
percent of the machines recommended were produced abroad. 
And in the good cateqory none of the machines were produced 
in the O.S. Again the conclusion would be that the best 
■achiuo to buy is a foreign one. Thus one could conclude 


119 



that foreign manufacturers are making substantial inroads 
into the n.S. narket both in terms of the quality of 
performance and in teres of the quantity of machines sold. 

S D. Cost Comp arison s 

The influence of cost differences requires some 
clarification. The typewriter industry's hourly wage in 
the United States by the early 1960's for example, was 
about three times the hourly waqes paid in West Sermany, 
'the main exporter. However, fringe benefits are much 
larqer overseas. On balance, it has been estimated that 
foreiqn production costs of typewriters runs two-thirds to 
three-lourths of those in the United States.* 3 

Indeed, by the early 1960's, contemplation of 
additional overseas movements of typewriter production was 
qiven very serious reconsideration. There were still 
substantial cost advantaqos in producing abroad. However, 
the differences were such that including start-up costs a 
period of about five years was required for returning the 
initial investment. But there was some indication of 
rising wage trends in Europe, which might unduly extend the 
payback period for the initial investment. These trends 
brouqbt the comparative advantage of manufacturing abroad 
versus in thej United States into a closer relationship. 
For some companies the advantage appeared to be to 


120 



modernize O.S. plants rather than to continue to shift 
production abroad. 14 

Any potential cost advantaqes that foreiqn producers 
of the electric typewriters miqht have is offset by IBB. 
"It is qeneral knowledqe that IBH produces components and 
parts abroad both for its typewriters and electronic data 
processinq equipment. This enables IBB' to have multiple 
sources of supply. It also enables IBH to select a country 
where raw material sources and labor skills miqht have a 
relative production advantaqe. Also, the loqistics can be 
'so formulated that minimal transportation expenses in 
relation to value will be incurred. 

E. Market Share Cons ider ation 

While the impact of foreiqn competition in shift of 
manufacturinq operations from the U.S. abroad has caused a 
fundamental shift in the balance of payments effects of 
typewriter exports and imports, market share trends as 
measured have been much less affected. Table III-4 , in 
Chapter III sets forth market shares by porcentaqes of the 
lcadinq five American firms by a number of seqsents of the 
typewriter market. The "other" cateqory represents a 
number of small American firms, but mostly foreiqn 
companies. For the office electric machine, the total of 
the foreiqn manufacturers could not have exceeded 6.6 


121 



percent. However, at the other end of the range in the 
portable typewriter sequent of the market, the share of the 
foreiqn coopanies could have been as high as 17.6 percent. 
Similarly, for the manual office typewriters, the share of 
the foreign companies could have been almost 14.9 percent. 

Since there are a number of foreiqn manufacturers, 
the market share in D.S. consunption of the foreiqn 
mancfacturcrs individually is relatively small. It is 
unlikely that any individual manufacturer exceeds five per 
cent, and the probability is more on the order of magnitude 
*of 2-3 percent for the reasons indicated in the discussions 
in the preceding chapter on the problems of marketing by 
the foreiqn manufacturer. 

However, as indicated, the foreiqn manufacturer could 
make a significant penetration in particular segments of 
the market. This is true in the low price range portable 
typewriter. Where the dependence on marketing organization 
by the foreiqn manufacturer is not great, the foreiqn 
manufacturer can utilize the mass retailing outlets in 
order to achieve distribution of the portable typewriter. 
Dealers are typically used by the foreiqn manufacturers for 
office typewriters.Some progress has been made throuqh 
dealers in selling the manual office typewriter, but this 
is a declining share of the oarket. 

Even if foreign manufacturers wore to have a superior 
product in the office electric typewriter, they could not 


122 



■ake substantial inroads on the established and increasing 
Barket position of IBfl without some method for solvinq the 
dileeca in marketing strategy detailed in the preceding 
chapter on the role of marketing and distribution 
"organizations. 

This inportant aspect of marketing and service 
organization is emphasized by the recent problens 
encountered by the SCM Corporation in connection with 
aarketinq its portable electric typewriter. The portable 
electric typewriter of SCM must be sold primarily in the 
‘consuncr market. To reach the consumer market, the 
business economics of effective aarketinq and and servicing 
the portable electric have virtually forced SCM to use the 
independent dealer channel of distribution. 

Purinq the last year, SCM has been dismantling its 
branch and direct sales organization. Without a strong 
product in the standard office electric typewriter field, 
SCH has been unable to sustain a branch and direct sales 
and service organization without a level of cost that had 
seriously impaired its ability to be a viable competitor in 
that sequent of the typewriter market. 

Thus, the lesson is clear for the forciqn 
Bauuf actuinr. If it has already developed a superior 
office electric typewriter, there is a potential tor share 
of the 0.5. market accounting for not nuch note than 2-3 
percent. The alternative strategy is for the foreign 


123 



manufacturer to qamble somethinq on the order of $100 
aillion in a $600 Billion industry as did Olivetti in the 
attempt to either buy a marketing orqanization or to 
establish one de novo. &n additional risk is that of 
-incurring operatinq losses for an undetermined number of 
years until a market density, sufficient to absorb the 
heavy cost of a nationwide marketing and service 
orqanization would produce sufficient volume to brinq these 
costs as a percentage of sales down to a region required 
for normal profitability. 


124 



FOOTMOTES TO CHAPTE3 V 


1- 36 Stat. 11.32. 

' s ~2. 38 Stat. 114, 156. 

3. 42 Stat. 858, 926. 

4. 46 Stat. 590, 683. 

5. United States Typewriter, Analysis and Trends* 1958-66 
(Uashinqton, D. C.; U.S. Department of Commerce, Business 

'and Defense Services Administration) p. 2. 


6. SCO Annual Report , 1960. 


7. "Shifts Kay Improve Typewriter Hesults", Financial 
World (January 11, 1961) p. 13. 


8. Ibid . 


9. I hM . 


10. World Trade in Typewriter* 1948- 195B . (Uashinqton, 
D.C.: U.S. Department of Commerce, Business and Defense 
Services Administration, June 1959) p. 9. 


11. iMil .. p. 4. 


12. The sample of machines were selected by buyinq th? 
most delux manual eoael or models — if two carriaqc sizes 
were available — ot ten leadinq brands. If a low priced 
unit was available it was also purchased. Also the middle 
of the line models were purchased from 01 ivott i-ll ne’er wood, 
Beuinqton, SCK and tioyal. These firms account for 80 
percent of the market. Koyal has no middle line model. 


125 






13. "Modernizing Fever Hits Typewriter Plants," Business 
Week , (March 18,1961) p. 130. 

% 

IS- Ibid .. p. 130. 


126 




CHAPTER VI 


THE IHPACT OF THE IBH ELECTHIC TYPEW HIT ER 

A. Early History of the Electr ics 

The first American typewriter patented in 1829 by an 
inventor named William Burt was a -"crude, clanking 
contraption for printinq letters."* A really successful 
typewriter for volume production was not achieved until 
Sholes* typewriter of 1873. But the first American 

* typewriter of 1829 was built around a revolving wheel with 
an alphabet etched into its rim. The modern electric 

typewriter, introduced by IBH in 1961, followed a basic 
concept of the Burt machine. 2 

In the intervening years, between 1829 and modern 
developments for the electric typewriter, a number of 
efforts had been made to produce an electric typewriter. 
The Blickensderfer Electric of 1908 "had been quite an 
impressive affair." 5 The Electric Power Typewriter Company 
of Canada had brouqht out a "sound, well-designed electric" 
in 1906 and in 1910 Ellis had brouqht out a "remarkable 
machine, electrically powered, which was not only a 
typewriter but an adding machine and a billing machine, to 
boot. All these noble experiments had ended in disaster."* 

In 1919, a James Smathers, of Kansas City, began 
working on an electric typewriter. The North East Electric 


12? 



Company of Rochester, Hew Tork, took over the Saathers 
models in the 1920's. Royal and Remington had electrics as 
early as 1925, bnt dropped the programs within 3 or 4 
years. 5 

The ^ Remington electric attracted considerable 
attention. In an analysis of the potentials of the 
Reainqton electric, aany of the attributes of the electric 
typewriter, which have led to its pre-eminent position, 
particularly in office typewriters, were recoqnized. In a 
detailed analysis, the advantages of the electric 
‘typewriter were set forth.® The contributions of the Horth 
East Electric Company in the development of the electric 
typewriter were detailed and the pre-eminence of the 
Reminqton Electric were discussed. The analysis concluded, 
"Mow that the electric typewriter is here, we wonder how we 
ever qot along without it, for it has such a broad field 
for potential accomplishment ." 7 

But despite the potentials of the electric typewriter 
as seen by some, both Royal and Remington, which had 
electrics by the aid 1920’s and had been offered the 
Saathers model, left the field. Burroughs Corporation 
entered the typewriter industry with both electrics and 
■annals in 1935, but left the market in 1936.* 


128 



B. The Entry of IBK 

In the midst of the depression (1933), International 
Bnsiness Hachines entered the typewriter field by acquiring 
a fira called Electronatic Typewriters, Inc., which 
previously liad been a part of the Worth East Electric 
Coapany. IBS's interest was said to- be aainly in the 
possibility of acquiring some concepts that could be used 
on its keypunch machine. Host of the major typewriter 
producers did not see the potential of the electric 
* typewriter. Indeed, writing in 1954, Bruce Bliven 
commented, "The typist has not yet brought in her final 
verdict."* 

When IBS made its decision to enter the typewriter 
industry, it went all the way. As a Porbes article pointed 
out, "President Thomas Watson continued to believe that the 
electric's time would come". In retrospect the article 
pointed out that "industry gossip has it that IBS didn't 
actually make money on its electric until three or four 
years aqo".*® The article concluded by stating: 

Whether true or not, IBS by a 28 year 
display of quts and preseverance can now take 
satisfaction that its qamble has fully paid off 
and has put the company so far ahead of its 
competitors that it today dosinantes this capidly 
increasing market. 


129 



C. The War Years- J35JrJSi}§ 

Daring the World War II period, the country was 
divided into critical zones with regard to the war effort. 
The northeast area was declared a critical zone. Within 
three months after Pearl Harbor, the traditional old-line 
typewriter companies were ordered to cease producing 
typewriters and to devote their production facilities to 
products contributing to the war effort. There were two 
major exceptions. One was the Woodstock Typewriter 

* Cocpany, whose plant in Chicago, Illinois was premitted to 
continue to sake manuals on a United basis. 

The other important exception was IBH. IBH was 

producing typewriters in an area not included in the 

critical Hew England area. Not only did IEfl continue to 

produce its electric typewriters, but the conpany was 
successful in the acceptance of its sales slogan that one 
electric replaced two manual typewriters and thus saved 
both materials and labor. IBH was particularly successful 
in selling the electric typewriters to government agencies. 
This resulted in the assigning of priority requests so that 
IBH was able to receive materials for continued manufacture 
of the electric typewriter. 

It is interesting and ironic to note that almost 
immediately after the stoppage of the production of 
typewriters a great shortage of typewriters arose in the 


130 




governmental aqencies. This was to provide a qreat 
advantage to IBS. 

Badio listeners in early 1943 were made aware of the 
P.S. Government's critical need of typewriters. Durinq the 
war the D.S. Artsy estimated a need for 1 million machines. 
The Royal Company had on its enveloped the sloqan, "Oar 
fiqhtinq men need 25 percent of your typewriters, sell them 
today throuqh your nearest War Production Board Offices". 12 

By December 1943, limited production of typewriters 
for use in the Army, Navy and flaritime Commission had been 
'authorized in non critical labor areas. The Royal plant, 
which was located in a critical region, was not authorized 
to resume production. On December 6, 1943 Reminqton Rand 
said it was producing a small number of typewriters for 
government use only. Around the same time, L.C. Smith & 
Corona resumed manufacture of typewriters on a very limited 
scale under the authorization of the War Production Board. 
On a radio broadcast of December 5, 1943, it was reported 
that typewriter rationing was beinq eased. This occurred 
for two reasons: (1) Decreased government requirements for 
used typewriters and (2) limited manufacture of new 
machines. Rationinq of all used and new machines ended 
Saturday April 22, 1944.»» 

Pull peacetime production of typewriter commenced on 
July 1, 1946. By the 23rd of the month, Reminqton Rand was 
in full production of manuals. Shortly thereafter most of 


131 



the other manufacturers were qetting back into full 
production with large backlogs of orders. At about the 
sane tine, an industry strike occurred which - slowed 
production. By July 28,1947 the strike was being 
settled.*♦ 

Thus, government policy, as it affected IBB during 
the Borld Bar II period was of great' significance in its 
inpact on the structure of the industry following the war. 
By placing electric typewriters with government agencies 
and na-Jor war contractors, a nunber of market results were 
* accomplished by IBB. First, IBB was able to introduce its 
electric typewriters at a nuch faster pace than otherwise. 
Second, the wide experience with the electric typewriter 
during Sorld Bar II contributed to product acceptance which 
provided IBB with a favorable market in the postwar 
years.** Third, the old line nanual typewriter companies 
suffered two unfavorable consequences. (A) Bhen the war 
ended, the first priority for the nanual typewriter 
conpanies was to renew their skills with the nanual 
typewriter. They had been producing other products during 
the war so that it would have been extremely risky to 
attenpt to begin with an entirely new product such as an 
electric. (B) because of the product acceptance achieved 
by IBB during the war period, the tine available to the 
old-line producers of nanual typewriters to develop 

electric typewriters to neet the narket impact of IBB was 


132 



shortened 


this combination of the impetus and advantages 
provided by IB3 during the war, the taking of the major 
traditional typewriter companies out of the typewriter 
business for almost four years, has not only had a lasting 
impact upon the manual typewriter companies, but has also 
had a substantial impact on the subsequent developments of 
the industry’s structure. 

D. Adv anta ges of the E lectric Type writer o ver the Hanual 
' Typew r ite r 

The initial demand for electric typewriters began 
durinq the early 1950’s. At that time a number of factors 
led businessmen to seek ways to operate their firms more 
efficiently. The first of these factors was the increased 
volume of paperwork resulting from the demands of modern 
business and the expanded requirements for statistical 
information to comply with federal and state legislation 
and union demands. Concurrent with the jump in paperwork 
cane a larqe increase in both the number of new firms and 
the number of office employees. From 1939 to 1953 the 
number of firms increased from 3.2 million to 4.2 million. 
The increase in the number of office employees as measured 
by the ratio of office help to total employed rose from 4 
percent in 1930 to 13.6 percent in January of 1954. 


133 



Thus the demand for office typewriters has risen in 
proportion to the increase in the nusber of firms in 
existence and the increase in the volume of office help. 
However, coupled with the increases in the volume of paper 
wort, the number of firms and the quantity of office help 
was the inflexability of waqe costs and the spread of the 
five day worlc week which placed a premium on labor savinq 
devices for office use. 

The early phase in the demand for office typewriters 
is summarized in an industry survey of that period. It 
stated: 


ilonq vith electronic devices, businessmen 
are interested in automation of other office 
details and particularly in electric typewriters. 
The qrowinq trend toward mechanization of 
clerical routine is expanding this market 
rapidly. Electrics currently constitute 30 
percent of office typewriter sales against 10 
percent in 1950. with clerical wages going up 
steadily and qualified personnel relatively 
scarce the electric machine with its faster 
operations offers the businessmen a way to hold 
cost down. 16 


Thus the period of the early 1950's is characterized 
as one in which business and government were becominq aware 
of the increased demands placed upon them by a greater 
volume of paper work and by the need to become cost 
conscious in the office due to qeneral waqe increases and a 
shorter workweek. 

By the early 1960's the magnitude of the electric 
typewriter's influence was fully felt. Over the past 


134 



Thus the demand for office typewriters has risen in 
proportion to- the increase in the number of firms in 
existence and the increase in the volume of office help. 
However, coupled with the increases in the volume of paper 
work, the number of firms and the quantity of office help 
was the inflexability of waqe costs and the spread of the 
fixe day work week which placed a premium on labor savinq 
devices for office use. 

The early phase in the demand for office typewriters 
is summarized in an industry survey of that period. It 
stated: 


Along with electronic devices, businessmen 
are interested in automation of other office 
details and particularly in electric typewriters. 
The qrowinq trend toward mechanization of 
clerical routine is expanding this market 
rapidly. Electrics currently constitute 30 
percent of office typewriter sales aqainst 10 
percent in 1950. Kith clerical waqes qoinq up 
steadily and qualified personnel relatively 
scarce the electric machine with its faster 
operations offers the businessmen a way to hold 
cost down.* 6 


Thus the period of the early 1950's is characterized 
as one in which business and government were becoming aware 
of the increased demands placed upon then by a greater 
volume of paper work and by the need to become cost 
conscious in the office due to qeneral waqe increases and a 
shorter workweek. 

By the early 1960's the magnitude of the electric 
typewriter's influence was fully felt. Over the past 


134 



decade the sale of manual typewriters has decreased by 
about 40 percent. In 1961 the office electric typewriter 
sales accounted for approxiaately one-third the dollar 
sales volnae of the typewriter industry. By 1965 this had 
increased to abour 49 percent and by 1967 was 50 percent of 
total typewriter sales. 17 

In today's world of business - and government the 
qreater popularity of the electric typewriter arises from 5 
specific factors: (1) unifora print, (2) lore uniform 
copies, (3) less fatigue to the operator, (4) new operating 
features and (5) reduction of secretarial turnover. 

With the development of the electric typewriter it 
becaae possible to have each stroke of the typewriter made 
with the saae degree of pressure; with the nanual the 
iwpact of the keys upon the paper depends upon the applied 
pressure of the operator. As a result the electric 
typewriter provides better lookinq oriqinals. As lonq as a 
stenographer has the basic knowledge of spellinq, 
punctuation and letter structure, she can produce a high 
quality letter on an electric. With added typo styles and 
the carbon ribbon one can now produce sharply 
etchedcharacters that compliment and fully expose the type 
design, thus further improving the appearance of 
correspondence. On the other hand, the quality of output 
on the manual typewriter depends larqely on the skill of 
the operator. 


135 



An added factor to consider is that of norale. 
Because the electric provides a good final copy, reqardless 
of how experienced the user, even the less skilled worker 
can produce nore hiqh quality final copies. She thus 
reinforces her own aorale and helps inprove the over-all 
working environnent of the office. 

By insurinq uniforn print the electric typewriter can 
produce a much larqer quantity of clear carbon copies. 
Hithout any adjustment most electrics can produce five to 
seven leqible copies. With an adjustment of the impression 
* requlator (by the typist) nany nore copies can be nade. 
Thus for those firas that do not have access to a quality 
photo reproducer a considerable amount of tine will be 
saved by producinq a nuch larqer quantity of originals on 
the typewriter, nore work can then be accomplished in the 
sane qiven anount of tine, thereby helping to reduce 
clerical costs. 

The third advantaqe of the electric over the nanual 
is an inportant selling feature of the electric -- this is 
the fatique factor. Approximately two ounces of pressure 
is required to activate the key on an electric, compared to 
approximately two pounds of pressure on the nanual. By 
usinq an electric, a full tine typist will be less 
fatiqued. She can produce nore work in a qiven period with 
less expenditure of effort. Despite the hiqher initial 
cost of the electric typewriter, if an increase in work 


13 6 



efficiency — on the order of three to five percent — is 
achieved the use of the electric typewriter would seen to 
be economically practical. 

The fourth advantage of the electric typewriter is 
also related to increased productivity — this is the 
introduction of new features made possible only by the 
electric typewriter. Items such as an automatic carriage 
return, proportional spacing, horizontal half spacing, and 
automatic repeat actions such as dots, dashes, underscores 
and crossouts not only decrease the amount of fatigue 
typically encountered in manual operation but also decrease 
the tine involved to complete a piece of wort. This helps 
increase productivity and lower clerical costs. 

There has been a sharp increase in the popularity of 
the electric typewriter among secretarial personnel due 
largely to the advantages that have been outlined above. 
By providing their staff with a more acceptable machine, 
firms have substantially reduced the turnover of 
secretarial personnel. This reduction in turnover has led, 
in turn, to lower employment and training costs.** 

The advantages of the electric typewriter can bo 
further examined by analyzing them in terms of a capital 
budgeting model. Assume a firm is considering the 
replacement of all its manual typewriters with electrics.** 
The reason for the replacement of the typewriters is that 
the firm is convinced that substantial savings can be 


137 



obtained by an increase in office productivity.The 
increased productivity is due to four factors. These are: 
Cl) increased speed, (2) better quality of work, (3) the 
ability to use typists of lover quality and still produce 
hiqh quality work (especially on stencils and dittos), and 
(3) the reduction of fatique. 

The level of increased productivity can vary 
considerably. As mentioned earlier in the chapter, IBH — 
durinq World War II — claimed that with the electric 
typewriter one typist could do the work of two. This would 
have increased the work efficiency by 50 percent or could 
have reduced the labor force by 50 percent. 

Today the increase in productivity varies with the 
nature of the user. At one extreme, the aerospace industry 
would constantly have typewriters in use producing the 
larqe volume of proposals for new projects. Here the 
advantages of the electric typewriter would be substantial. 
At the other extreme a bank may have a girl typinq fiqures 
or correspondence for one or two hours per day. In this 
case the increase in productivity would be of a smaller 
magnitude. The experience of a number of firms indicates 
that they can obtain a 10 percent increase in productivity 
with the use of the electric typewriter. If a secretary 
devotes 50 percent of her time to typinq and earns $100 per 
week, then 10 percent of $50 would be a savings of S5.00 
per week. If a 50 week year is assumed then the annual 


138 



savings per machine would be $250. 

The sales of the firm average around $110 Billion 
each year. At present the firm has 100 manual typewriters 
that it purchased in 1964 at a price of $236. In 1964 the 
firn estimated the economic life of the asset to be 8 
years, and at the end of that tine they would have a 
salvaqe valuem of $40 per machine. If the firm buys the 
electric typewriters it will cost then $480 per machine. 
The economic life of the asset is 5 years and would have a 
salvaqe value of $144. 

The calculations for the analysis are shown in Table 
YI-1. The capital budgeting technique used to analyze the 
replacement decision is that of Net Present Value. The Net 
Present Value technique discounts the inflows at the cost 
of capital and relates the present value of the inflows to 
the present value of the outflows. If the net present 
value is positive, the prolect is accepted. If it is 
neqative, it is relucted. Hany theoreticians have deemed 
this technique to be the most theoretically correct. Here 
it is assumed that the firms cost of capital is 10 percent. 
The analysis separates the inflows from the outflows and 
analyzes them on an after tax basis. It is assumed that 
the tax rate is 50 percent. 

The initial investment for 100 new electric 
typewriters at S480 is $48,000. This event has a zero 
timing since it occurs now and has a present value factor 


139 



140 


TABLE VI-1 


CALCULATIONS FOR REPLACEMENT DECISION AT 10 PERCENT EFFICIENCY 


Outflows at time investment Is made; 
Investment in new 

AMOUNT 

BEFORE 

TAX 

AMOUNT 

AFTER 

TAX 

YEAR 

EVENT 

OCCURS 

PV 

FACTOR 
at 10% 

PRESENT 

equipment 

48,000 

48,000 

0 

1.0 

48,000 

Sales price of old 

(5,000) 

(5,000) 

0 

1.0 

(5,000) 

Tax loss on sale 

Total outflows (present value 

(2,350) 
of costs) 

(1,175) 

0 

1.0 

-(1.175), 
$ 41,825 


Inflows, or annual returns: 
Benefits 

25,000 

12,500 

1-5 

3.791 

47,388 

Depreciation on new 
(annual) 

9,600 

4,800 

1-5 

3.791 

18,197 

Depreciation on old 
(annual) 

(2,450) 

(1,225) 

1-3 

2.487 

(3,046) 

Salvage value on new 

14,400 

14,400 

5 th 

.621 

8,942 

Maintenance on new 

(3,570) 

(1,785) 

1-5 

3.791 

( 6 , 767 ) 

Maintenance on old 

2,100 

1,050 

1-3 

2.487 

2,614 

Total inflows (present value of benefits) 




$ 67 , 328 ” 

Present value of inflows, less 

present value of 

outflows 

- $25,503 





of 1.0. The sale of the 100 aanual aachines is a negative 
outflow and is assumed to occur at the sane tine as the 
purchase of the new aachine, at the tine of the sale the 
fira was able to realize $50 per aachine. When the aanuals 
were purchased in 1964 it was deternined that their 
econoaic life was 8 years. Osing straight line 
depreciation and depreciation eacli aachine toward a $40 
salvage value would yield an annual aaount of depreciation 
of $24.50 per aachine. This assuaes an initial purchase 
price of $236. The aachines are 5 years old and have a 
book value of $7,350; since the fira only realized $5,000 
froa their sale there was a loss of $2,350 before taxes. 
This aaount is also a negative outflow. Thus the present 
value of the outflows with a zero tine factor is $41,825. 

By replacing the manuals, the fira will save $250 per 
aachine or $25,000 per year before taxes for all the 
aachines. It is assuaed that the economic life of the 
electric typewriters is 5 years. The present value factor 
of an annuity for 5 years is 3.791. With a useful life of 
5 years and a salvage value of $144 per electric machine. 
The annual straight line aaount of depreciation on the 
electrics will be $9,600 per year before taxes. With the 
sale of the aanuals the firs will lose the advantage of 
depreciation froa the manuals. This is a negative inflow 
for 3 years. The salvaqe value on the electrics will be 
$144 per aachine and will occur in the 5th year. 


1*1 



With the parchase of the electrics an annual service 
contract is arranged at $35.70 per aachine. However with 
the sale of the aannals the fira will save service costs of 
$21 per aachine for 3 years. 

The present value of the inflows is $67,328. The net 
present value is $25,503. According to the decision 

criterion of net present value the fira should aake the 

replaceaent decision. 

In addition to calculating the net present value for 
the replaceaent decision, one could also calculate the 
'internal rate of return on the project. The internal rate 
of return is defined as that rate of discount that equates 
the present value of the inflows to the present value of 

the outflows. Table VI-2 presents the data on the 

calculations for the internal rate of return. First the 
annual net cash flows are calculated. These are defined as 
benefits plus depreciation plus a rebate on the naintenance 
expense for the annuals less the loss of depreciation on 
the old aachine and the aaount of aaintenance expense on 
the electrics. With the cash flows deterained one can 
calculate the internal rate of return. Throuqh trial and 
error it was found that the internal rate of return was 
between 29 and 30 percent. If aanaqeaent was using a cost 
of capital of 10 percent, the replaceaent decision would be 
worth while. 

If, on the other hand, the increase in productivity 



TABLE VI-2 


CALCULATIONS FOR INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN 


Determining Net Cash Flows : 




Years 1-3 

Year 4 

Year 5 

Benefits 
+Depreciation 
on New 


$12,500 

4,800 

$12,500 

4,800 

$12,500 

4,800 

-Depreciation 
on Old 


$17,300 

1,225 

$17,300 

$17,300 

-Maintenance 
, on New 


$16,075 

1,785 

$17,300 

1,785 

$17,300 

1,785 

+Maintenance 
on Old 


$14,290 

1,050 

$15,515 

$15,515 

+Salvage Value 


$15,340 

$15,515 

$15,515 

14,400 

Annual net Cash 

Flows 

$15,340 

$15,515 

$29,915 

Determining the 

Internal 

Rate of Return: 





At 297, 

At 

307, 



Cash 

Interest 

Years 

Flow 

Factor 

I 

$15,340 

.775 

2 

$15,340 

.601 

3 

$15,340 

.466 

4 

$15,515 

.361 

5 

$29,915 

.280 

Present 

Value of 

Cash Flows: 

-Present 

Value of 

Outflows: 


New Present Value 


Present 

Value 

Interest 

Factor 

Present 

Value 

$11,888 

.769 

$11,796 

9,219 

.592 

9,081 

7,148 

.455 

6,980 

5,601 

.350 

5,430 

8,376 

.270 

8,077 

$42,232 


$41,364 

$41,825 



$ 407 


$ (461) 



was only between 3-5 percent, the replacement would still 
be worth while. The calculations for an increase in 
productivity of 5 percent are shown in Table VI-3. The net 
present value is 11,809 which is wuch smaller than when a 
10 percent increase in productivity was assumed. But 
still, the factors of increased quality and decreased 
fatique were not fully taken into account. 

In reality this type of investnent decision is such 
that it falls into the class of absolute necessity. A rate 
of return analysis is not as important as with other 
'investnent decisions. It is a known fact that a firm that 
wants to operate efficiently must have a good lighting, 
heatinq and coolinq system. Sinilarly, a firm must have 
typewriters to handle the larqe volume of paperwork. In 
today’s world qood typists wouldn't consider working in an 
office without an electric typewriter. 

Thus there exists several distinct advantages in the 
use of the electric versus the manual typewriter. The 


over-all 

advantage reflects 

itself in 

the 

ability 

Of 

business 

and government to 

increase 

the 

level 

of 


productivity while at the same time reducing the over-all 
cost of office operations. 


E. Spe cific Advantages to I.B,H, 

foreign companies bad developed electrics early 


144 



TABLE VI-3 


CALCULATIONS FOR REPLACEMENT DECISION AT 5 PERCENT EFFICIENCY 


AMOUNT 

BEFORE 

TAX 

Outflows at time Investment Is made: 

Investment in new 

AMOUNT 

AFTER 

TAX 

YEAR 

EVENT 

OCCURS 

PV 

FACTOR 
at 107. 

PRESENT 

VALUE 

equipment 

48,000 

48,000 

0 

1.0 

48,000 

Sales price of old 

(5,000) 

(5,000) 

0 

1.0 

(5,000) 

Tax loss on sale 
Total outflows 

(2,350) 

(present value of costs) 

(1,175) 

0 

1.0 

—(1.1.17,3)... 
$ 41,825 




Inflows, or annual returns: 
Benefits 

12,500 

6,250 

1-5 

3.791 

23,694 

Depreciation on new 
(annual) 

9,600 

4,800 

1-5 

( 3.791 

18,197 

Depreciation on old 
(annual) 

(2,450) 

(1,225) 

1-3 

2.487 

(3,046) 

Salvage value on new 

14,400 

14,400 

5th 

.621 

8,942 

Maintenance on new 

(3,570) 

(1,785) 

1-5 

3.79 

(6,767) 

Maintenance on old 

2,100 

1,050 

1-3 

2.487 

2,614 

Total inflows (present value of benefits) 




$43,634 

Present value of inflows, less 

present value of 

outflows 

- $1,809 





because this was the direction of their aarket pressures. 
Sith the relatively snail markets defined by national 
boundaries, before the establishment of the European 
Economic Community and the European Free Trade Association, 
the coapanies in individual countries focused on technical 
developaents. The aia was to develop a proprietary product 
with distinct features and performance advantages which 
would enable the company to carve out a selected and 
soaewhat protected share of the aarket. The rapidly 
expanding aarket for electric typewriters in the U.S. 
* offered attractive possibilities to the foreign 
aanufacturers, but their potentials for any significant 
aarket penetration were liaited by aarketing and 
distribution problems of the type discussed in detail in 
Chapter IV, dealing with the distribution system. 
Basically, to establish a direct sales organization nation 
wide involves huqe outlays and continued operating losses 
until the necessary voluae can be obtained to support such 
an organization. This has provided IBH, by sellinq at 
prices conpetitive with both aanuals and other electric 
typewriters, a sufficient aargin for continuous improveaent 
in the basic product. 

These advantages have been autually reinforcing. IBM 
started with a qood machine. Taking off froa a nationwide 
organization established in connection with its unit record 
eguipaent before the advent of electronic data processing 



equipment, IBB boilt a comparably strong marketing and 
service organization in the electric typewriter industry. 
Harketinq and service costs could thus be spread over a 
larqe Qusbcr of units and represented a snail p e rcentaga of 
sellinq prices. 

ill of the major producers of office electric 
typewriters now have service contracts that are similar in 
mature. The annual cost of a service contract is 
approximately $42.00. Service contract discounts are given 
on all purchases of 5 or more machines. A 5 percent 
* discount is given on purchases of 5-24 machines, a 10 
percent discount is qiven on purchases of 25 to 49 
machines, and a 15 percent discount is qiven on purchases 
above 50 machines. Sperry Rand provides an attractive 3 
year service contract at a cost of S104.85. If more than 
25 machines are purchased the service contract is provided 
at a cost of $84.00. Royal on the other hand no lonqer 
provides discounts on a 3 year contract. This may be the 
result of a larqe number on mechanical breakdowns on the 
Royal office electric typewriter. The reinforcing 
advantages of low cost, stronq market position and improved 
market product have provided IBB with an increasingly 
dominant position in the electric typewriter field, and 
thus the typewriter market as a whole. 

Second, in concentrating on a larqe and attractive 
segment of the typewriter market, with the density of its 


147 



marketing and servicinq organization, IBH has been able to 
achieve two other marketing strateqies. It has been able 
to assiqn smaller and smaller territories to its sales anc’ 
service staff, and yet provide compensation substantial!} 
higher than its competition could offer. Thus, interna 
coverage of smaller market areas is achieved. This intens< 
coveraqe includes attention to even the small, individua 
office, and thus sweeps virtually all segments of th 
available market for standard electric typewriters into th 
IBH orbit. 

A third important advantage for IBH is that its sale 
and service organization can carry a broad line o 
typewriter-kind of products. This is an even greatr 
advantaqe than the attempt to combine typewriters and othc 
types of office machines such as calculators in its diroc 
salesmen. The latter attempt has some advantages, lx 
involved sufficiently different unit values and functloi 
so that the kind of specialization and knowledge ' 
products achieved by IBH's salesmen in the 
typewriter-related line in not equalled. The lino 
products carried by the IBH salesmen are focused on t 
Hodel D typewriter, the Executive Proportional Spncl 
typewriter, the Haqnetic Tape/Selectric typewriter, 
composing typewriter which combines the editinq capablll 
of the HT/ST with an automatic margin and page spncl 
capability, IBH dictating nachineds, and typewrit 


148 



supplies. 

A fourth important advantage of IBB in the typewriter 
aarket is its carryover with its commanding position in the 
electronic data processinq industry. In sellinq EDP 
products, IBB salesmen achieve market acceptance for the 
full line of IBB products, particularly since EDP purchases 
are aade at the vice-presidential and hiqher levels. This 
obtains product acceptance with officials who are superior 
in position to purchasinq aqents who aay aake the final 
decision on the purchase of typewriters. 

ks emphasized in the previous discussion of aarketinq 
and distribution systems in the typewriter industry and in 
discussinq the impact of foreiqn competition, the 
conaandinq position of IBB is reinforcinq and increasinq, 
particularly in the typewriter industry. The advantaqes of 
a qood product, favorable density factor for reducing costs 
of a large aarketinq and servicing organization with 
intensive coverage of individual areas and customer, the 
resulting favorable aarqin for continued product 
iaprovenent, the atolity to attract high quality salesmen 
and custoaer engineers by favorable conpensation payments 
are all autually reinforcinq. 

Thus, in the full-featured electric typewriter 
seqaent of the industry, which by dollar voluae represents 
approxiaately one-half of the total typewriter industry, 
IBB increased its market share during the period 1960 


lU? 



through 1968 by approximately 18 percentage points to 
almost 80 percent of the market. 

This increase in IBFl's aarket share in an eight-year 
period of tine is eguivalent to acquiring a number of 
typewriter businesses of a magnitude equal to that now held 
by almost all of the other typewriter companies, both 
dom estic and foreign. Thus, if the emphasis of the 
structural approach to markets is followed, an increase in 
concentration by the already dominant firm from over 60 
percent of the market to alaost 80 percent, has a greater 
iapact on market concentration than would the merging of 
any two or three other firms in the industry. But more 
iaportant, it demonstrates the need for entry conditions 
into the industry of a nature that would make it possible 
to stem the continued and increasing advantages of IBn. 

F. The Deve lop ment of the Electric Por tab le by SCH 

While IBH is the recognized leader in office 
electric typewriters another coapany has expended a great 
deal of enerqy, tine and aoney in the development of the 
electric portable typewriter. SCH recognized that as larqe 
as the aarket is for office electric typewriters another 
■arket for electric aachincs had eaerged — that of the usa 
of electric typewriters in the home. Recoqnizinq that the 
IBH Selectric would cost around $900 and that other 


150 



electrics would be somewhat less expensive but still quite 
hiqh, a new concept was needed to bring the electric 
typewriter into the hone at a lore reasonable cost to the 
consumer. 

The SCtl portable electric has been on the market 
since the early 1960's. The need for such a aachine was 
eaphasized in their annual reports for 1961 and 1964. In 
the 1961 report they stated: 

Hiqh school and college students who 
coaprise the najor market are expected to 
increase from 13 million in 1960 to 17 million by 
1965, a 30 percent increase. 

In their 1964 report they further pointed out that: 

Two surveys coverinq 2,000 dealers and 
students at 10 universities indicated that nore 
and nore consumers are demanding electric 
portables.** 

Thus exists a clear and distinct aarket for electric 
portables in the life of students, in the hoae and in small 
business. 

In 1961 the SCH portable typewriter was sold by over 
12,000 dealers throughout the U.S. Also, a line of 
portables was developed for exclusive sale by selected 
dealers.In addition, portable typewriters were sold under 
private labels such as the Tower Line for Sears, the Golden 
Shield Line by Golden Shield Corporation, and the 
Enterprise distributed by World Book. 


151 



At this time SCH was the only producer of electric 
portables and the second larqest producer of electric 
typewriters. In 1967 SCH still aaintained this position 
with 9.7 percent of the office electric aarket , 43.5 
percent of the portable market and 17.5 percent of the 
total typewriter aarket. 

In 1963 SCB introduced the Poweriter, the worlds 
first self powered electric typewriter which had a self 
contained rechargeable nickel cadmium energy cell.And in 
1968 another model — the 210 Automatic Portable — was 
* added which had a power carriage return and power spacing. 

Besides the portable electric line, SCH also produces 
a compact office electric aodel — the SCH 250. In 1968 
the Secretarial 315 office electric typewriter was 
introduced. Unable to compete against IBH and due to 
economic conditions which made the firm unable to hire, 
train and maintain salesmen and facilities in all but a few 
large metropolitan areas, SCH has had to discontinue its 
direct sales organization for office electric typewriters. 

During 1968 sales of the SCH electric portable 
increased alonq with its share of the domestic market. To 
a degree this shows the extent to which consumers have 
accepted the portable electric. However data on the 
technical efficiency of the machine is quite scarce. The 
Consumer Bulletin for 1968 found that the SCH portable 
electric was a good machine and recommended its purchase.** 


152 



One case that developed which nay question the 
reliability of the SCH electrics is the experience of the 
los Inqeles School System. It was fonnd that the SCH model 
250 office electric was not satisfactory in terns of 
maintenance. Portables and coapact office electrics will 
no lonqer be used in the classroom for they are unable to 
stand up to constant hard usaqe. Nothing less than full 
office machines will be used in the future. Thus in this 
area SCH appears to have run into a certain degree of 
difficulty. Hore details on this problem will be examined 
in the chapter dealinq with the educational market for 
typewriters. 


153 



FOOTNOTES TO CH APTER VI 

1. "Hew Typewriter Uses Old Idea," Business W eek (August 

5, 1961) p. 48. 

2. Ibid. 

3. Bruce Bliven, Jr., The Won derful Writing Machine (New 
Tork: Random House, 1954) p. 171. 


4 . Ibid. 


5. "Hodernizinq Fever Hits Typewriter Plants", Business 
Week ((larch 18, 1961) p. 126. 


6.. "At Last, a Completely Electrified Typewriter," Gas and 
El ectric New s. published by the Rochester Gas £ Electric 
Corporation, Vol. 14 (April 1927) p. 377. 


7. Ibid. 


8. Business Week . Harch 18, 1961, op, cit .. p. 126. 

9. Bruce Bliven, op 4 -cit., p. 172. 

10. "Good Hanaqeaent kn Action", Forbe s (October 15, 1961) 
p. 23. 

11. Ibid. 

12. Arthur Foulke, Hr* Typewriter (Boston: Christopher 
Publishing House, 1961) p. 123. 


13. IbjL<l.» P- 112. 


154 




14. Ibid., p. 114 


15. Business Week, flarch 18, 1961, op. cit.. p. 126. 

16. Standard S Poors, Industry Surveys . Office Equipment 
Industry, June 2i, 1956. 


17. John Sine, "Typewriters", Adm inist ra tiv e Banagenent 
(Bay 1961 p. 73.; and Facts f or Industry Series K35C, 
1948-1967, Bureau of the Census, “ O.S. Department of 
Commerce. 


18. The basic ideas of this section were developed with 
the aid of Lawrence Erickson, Dean of the School of 
Education ,UCLA and Wayne K. Boulton, Product Analysts for 
Royal Typewriter Division, Litton Industries. 


19. To obtain this information, it was agreed that 
individual firm names would not be used. 


20. SC H Ann ual R eport fo r 1961 . 

21. SCB Annual Report for- 1964. 

22. Con sumer Bulle t in (Annual 1968) p. 52. 


155 



CHAPTER VII 


HISTOBY ABD DIVERSIFICATION POLICIES OF THE TYPEHBITEB 

COHPAHIES 


Since 1873. the year in which typewriters went into 
production at the E. Remington 6 Sons factory in New York, 
three hundred ninety manufacturers of typewriters have come 
into being. Two hundred fifty of these were foreiqn 
companies. By 1960, only fifty manufacturers remained. 
Si* of these were in the O.S., while forty-four were 
foreiqn nanufacturinq companies. By 1968 there were five 
American conpanies of major significance in the 
manufacturing and sale of typewriters in the U.S. These 
were International Business Machines; Sperry-Rand, which 
included the predecessor Remington Rand; Litton Industries, 
which included the Royal Typewriter Company; 
Onderwood-Olivetti; and the SCH Corporation, which included 
the predecessor, L. C. Smith Company. 

A. jjistorjf of Firm Disappearance in the Typewriter 

Inausjri 

Hith only six of the oriqinal 140 O.S. typewriter 
firms remaining today, a question arises as to what 
happened to the other 134 firms. Bruce Bliven, in his book 


156 



The Wonderful Writing Hachine . lists 86 separate U.S. 
typewriter manufacturers and 22 foreiqn manufacturers. It 
was decided to analyze the 86 domestic coapanies in an 
atteapt to trace their history. 1 

Appendix I and II at the end of the chapter briefly 
outlines the history of the companies. Of the 86 firas 
listed by Bruce Bliven, data on 85 coapanies were 
available. Table VII-1 presents a suamary sheet of the 
appendix data. 

Of the 85 firms, 57 of them, or 67 percent went 
* bankrupt. Another 7 firms were predecessors to other 
typewriter firas that eventually went bankrupt. Six firms 
aerged with other firas that also went bankrupt. Of the 85 
firas two typewriter firms aerged with other firms that 
exist today but are not part of the typewriter industry. 
Another two aerqed with other typewriter firms that 
eventually merqed with oxistinq firms, while 6 firms aerqed 
directly with existing firms. 

The trend of concentration is quite visible froa this 
suaaary table. Of the 85 firms that vere in exstence in 
the early 1900's only five firms exist today. This aeans 
that 80 firms or 94 percent disappeared from 1910-1969. Of 
the 80 firms, 70 of then disappeared by bankruptcy, either 
directly or after aerqing with other firms that in turn 
disappeared by bankruptcy, this accounts for 82.2 percent 
of the firas. These firas were the failures, and as such. 


»57 



TABLE VII-1 


SUMMARY OF APPENDIX I AND II 
1910-1965 


Percent 

Category_ Number of Total 


TOTAL FIRMS 

85 

100.0% 

Cl) Firms that disappeared 
by bankruptcy 

57 

67.0% 

(2) Firms that were predecessors 

to other firms that disappeared 
by bankruptcy 

7 

8.2 

.(3) Firms that Merged with others 
that disappeared by bankruptcy 

6 

7.0 

SUBTOTAL: Disappeared by Bankruptcy 

70 

82.27. 

(4) Firms that Merged with 5 
Existing Firms 

8 

9.4 

(5) Firms that Merged with other 
Firms that Exist but not in 
the Typewriter Industry 

2 

2.4 

SUBTOTAL 

80 

94.0% 

(6) Firms that still exist today 

_5 

6.0 

TOTAL 

85 

100.0% 


158 


would not have contributed ouch to an acquiring firw. 
Further evidence of this is that 6 of the 70 did werge with 
other firas which eventually disappeared by bankruptcy. 

In total, there were 16 firas that underwent sone 
fora of nerqer activity. Of the 16 that aerqed, 10 aerqed 
with other firas and stayed alive while the other 6 
disappeared. While the data are not definitive on this, it 
deaonstrates that aerqinq or the acquiring of firas was not 
a quarantee of either continued narket effectiveness or 
even survival. And certainly the nergers did not result in 
*narket control. But the data does indicate that the market 
structure of the industry has been transformed froa one 
with 86 firas to one that is highly concentrated with five 
firas accounting for over 80 percent of the industry sales. 

B. Berger- Pat terns in the Typewriter I ndu s try 


Each of the five surviving U.S. typewriter companies 
had enqaged in diversification and merger programs at some 
tine during their history. A conspectus of the aerger 
history of the five surviving U.S. typewriter companies is 
shown in Table VII-2. The L.C. Smith Company, represented 
by the four Smith brothers, had joined in the Union 
Typewriter Coapany, which had been formed in 1893. In 1903 
the Saith Coapany separated froa Union Typewriter Coapany, 
foraing the L.C. Saith C Co. In 1926, the L.C. Saith 


139 



TABLE VXI-2 


MHtGHl HISTORY OUTLINE OF THE FIVE SURVIVING U.S. TYPEWRITER COMPANIES 


Surviving 



Date 

Acquisitions 

Company 

L.C* Smith & Co* 

1903 

From Union typewriter 

L.C. Smith k Co. 


1926 

Corona 

Smith-Corona 


1956 

1958 

Kleinschmidt Labs 
Merchant 

SCM Corp. 

Underwood 

1927 

Elliot-Fisher 

Undervood-Elliot- 


1963 

Olivetti 

Fisher 

Olivetti-Underwood 

Royal 

1954 

McBee 

Royal-McBee 


1965 

Litton 

Litton 


1966 

Imperial typewriter of 

Litton 

IBM 

1933 

England 

Electromatic typewriters, 

Inc. IBM 

E. Remington & 
Sons 

1886 

Sold to Wyekoff, Seamans 

and Benedict 


1893 

Became a part of Union typewriter Company, 


vhlch combined Remington (Wyekoff, Seamans and 
Benedict) vith Yost, Monarch, Smith Brothers, 
and Densmore. 

1903 Remington Typewriter Company separated from the 
Union typewriter Company 

1924 Noiseless Typewriter Company 

1927 Rand Company Remington Rand 

1955 Sperry Gyroscope Co. Sperry Rand Co. 


Source: Various Histories and Moody’s Investment Manuals. 


l<o 



Company merged with the Corona Coapany, which had developed 
an excellent portable typewriter. In 1956, the 
Kleinschaidt Laboratories were acquired. In 1958, a aerger 
with Harchant, a calculating aacbine coapany, resulted in 
theforaation of the SCH Corporation. The SCB Corporation 
enqaqed in an active aerqer and diversification prograa 
which will be discussed in a later section of this chapter 
dealinq with the post World War II strategies of the 
typewriter coapanies. 

The Onderwood Coapany had been an early leader in the 
industry. Its only aajor aerqer was with the Elliot-Pisher 
Coapany, an office aachine company. The naae was then the 
Onderwood Elliot-Pisher Company, until 1995, when it became 
known as the Onderwood Coapany. Hountinq difficulties in 
the late 1950’s resulted in investments by Olivetti and in 
1963 Olivetti took full ownership and control of Underwood. 

The Boyal Typewriter Coapany was a premier typewriter 
coapany during much of its history. It beqan facinq 
increased difficulties in the 1950’s. In 1954, a aerger 
was effected with the HcBee Coapany, an office aachine 
coapany. Difficulties increased and continued, however. 
In 1965 the Boyal Typewriter Company was acquired by Litton 
Industries. Litton Industries subsequently acquired the 
laperial Typewriter Coapany of Enqland in 1966. 

International Business Bachines had not been in the 
typewriter business. Some of the equipment used in 


161 



connection with its unit record accounting and tabulating 
■achines employed principles sinilar to typewriters. This 
was particularly true of the key punch machines. This was 
the basis for IBM's interest and willingness to buy 
Electromatic Typewriters, Inc., in 1933, after it had been- 
offered to both Underwood and Remington. 

The merger history of the Remington Company is 
somewhat more detailed. E. Remington £ Sons began 
producing the first typewriters in 1873. In 1886, after 
encountering financial difficulties, the typewriter portion 
* of the Remington Company was sold to Hyckoff, Seamans and 
Benedict. This business was an important component of the 
Union Typewriter Company formed in 1893. In addition to 
the Reninqton manufacturing activities, the companies 
associated with the names of lost, Densmore, and the Smith 
Brothers were included. In addition, the Monarch 
Typewriter Company was part of the Union Typewriter Company 
combination. 

In 1903, the Remington Typewriter Company separated 
from Union Typewriter Company. In 1924 the Reminqton 
Typewriter Company acquired the Noiseless Typewriter 
Company. In 1927, a merger between the Rand Company which 
bad developed office filinq and information storage and 
retrieval systems, took place to result in the Remington 
Band Company. In 1955, Remington Rand merqod with the 
Sperry Gyroscope Company to form the Sperry Band Company. 


162 



The Berger history of the five companies to some 
extent conforms to a qeneral pattern of Bergers in the 
United States. The formation of Onion Typewriter Company 
in 1893 was a part of the general major merger movement of 
the turn of the century. In general, the major movement at 
the turn of the century combined local and regional 
companies into national ones. In addition, it resulted in 
the combining of companies which previously had been in 
bitter competition to the point of •’sales wars.” But unlike 
some of the mergers at the turn of the century, the 
* formation of Union Typewriter Company did not result in 
market control. 

The next major merger activity took place in the mid 
1920’s. One of the objectives of mergers occurring at that 
time was to round out product lines for increasing the 
effectiveness of marketing and advertising programs. The 
merqers between typewriter companies and office machine and 
office filing companies also represented this type of 
merger objective. 

The mergers in the post World War II period in the 
D.S. have been merqers for diversification. Efforts have 
been made to enter industries that provided needed growth, 
stability, or a breadth of technological capability. In a 
number of them, mergers may well be described as mergers 
for survival. Aqain, the same influences were operative in 
the typewriter industry. 



These major merqer episodes were characterized by a 
nunher of fundamental developments in the natore of the 
typewriter. At the turn of the century, the front strike, 
which provided increased visibility for the operator, was 
an important improvement. The early 1920's saw the 
introduction of the portable typewriter. In addition, the 
principles of the noiseless typewriter were put into 
effective operation at that time. 

A great technological innovation was the beginning of 
the electric typewriter in the 1930»s. Then in the 

w m 

post-war period came the dominance of the electric 
typewriter, its relation to other data processinq systems, 
and the technological explosion in electro-mechanical 
systems and electronics, generally. 

C. nancial Jerms of the Bergers of the Fou r flajor 
Typewr iter Com panies 

Over the years, SCH has had an active merger history. 
Two of the most important mergers as far as the typewriter 
industry was concerned were the mergers of L.C. Smith and 
Corona in 1926 and the merger of Smith and Corona with 
Harchant in 1958. Table VII-3 and Figures YII-1 through 
TII-5 present data on SCH. It has already been stated that 
the 1926 merqcr of L.C. Smith and Corona waa to fill out 
the product line of the company. Unfortunately, as the 


16 k 



TABLE VU-3 


FIHAHCIAL TBEKS 0? VARIOUS SCM MERCIES 


1. L.C. Smith -- Corona (1925 incorporated) 

Tents: Data not available 

Data: (For 192k) 

_ L.C. Smith _ _ Corona _ 

llet Income $284,118 Earnings before $306,0o0 

Interest and taxes 

# of shares 19,065 30,000 

outstanding 

2. Smith-Corona — Marchant (June 26 , 1958) 

Terms: (l) Marchant common holders received 1 r share of SCM 
common for each share held. 


Per Share Data: 

Smith-Corona Marchant 


Dividends 
per share 

1956 

$1.80 

1957 

$1.00 

1956 1957 

stock dividends 

Earnings 
per share 

5.09 

4.27 

$0.90 

$3.27 

Humber of 
•hares of 

common 

423,132 

341,147 

622,767 

589,270 


Source: Moody's Industrie! Survey, 1920, 1959. 


l«5 



table demonstrates, data was scarce. It appears that the 
cocpani.es were fairly equal in size though there is no 
actual inforcation on the exact teres of the merger. The 
aain emphasis, however, was to combine a company — L.C. 
Smith — which had a good standard manual machine with a 
company — Corona — which had a good portable machine. 

The second important merger of Smith Corona was with 
Harchant in 1958. With diversification in mind one of the 
first areas that a typewriter company would turn to would 
be other office equipment. By examining the same tables 
* one observes that Smith-Corona was considerably larger than 
Harchant. The holders of Harchant common stock received 
1.25 shares of SCN common for each share held. At the time 
of the merqet Harchant had a price earnings ratio of 29.4 
compared to a price earnings ratio of 3.6 for Smith-Corona. 
The price earninqs ratio for the Dow Jones Industrial 
average at that time was 16.3. One observes that 
Harchant's P/E ratio was substantially above both 

Smith-Corona and the Dow Jones average. With such a high 

ratio one could conclude that investors felt that Harchant 
had good growth potential. At the time of the merger 
Harchant had a book value of $13 million. Smith-Corona 
paid approximately $20 million for Harchant which would 

lead one to believe that Smith-Corona thought that a merger 
with Harchant would be helpful in reversing a declining 

trend in sales and profits. 


166 



This serger demonstrated another typewriter fire's 
desire to deversify into a broader product line. Instead 
of the fire being solely in the typewriter industry SCB was 
now in the office equipment industry. 

Table VII-7 presents a comparison of the book value 
and actual purchase price for each of the major mergers of 
the traditional typewriter manufacturers for the period 
1930-1965. Data is presented in chronological order. 4 
discussion of each merger is provided in the text. 

The Underwood Company, like SCH, underwent two 
* mergers. The first was with Elliot-Fisher in 1928. 
Elliot-Fisher was a large manufacturer of typewriters as 
was Underwood. Like other typewriter mergers in the 1920's 
this primarily was a merger that rounded out the product 
lines. Looking at the data on Table VII-4 one observes 
that the asset size of Underwood was much greater than 
Elliot-Fisher, but that Elliot-Fisher had a larger amount 
of net income. This in part reflects the higher Earnings 
per Share for Elliot-Fisher. Unfortunately not enough data 
was available for further analysis. 

The merger in 1963 with Olivetti was a clear case of 
one company "bailing out" another. Underwood was in 
serious financial trouble as the data in Table VII-4 and 
figures VII-1 through VII-5 show. Olivetti, wanted to 
nerqe with a U.S. firm that possessed a larqe marketing and 
distribution system so that Olivetti could better penetrate 


1*7 



TABLE VII-4 


FINANCIAL TERMS OF VARIOUS OLIVETTI -UNDERVOOD MERGERS 


X. Undervood — Elllot-Fisher (January 1928) 

Terms: (l) Exchange 1 share of Undervood-Elllot Fisher 
series B $7 cumulative preferred for 1 share 
of Elliot Fisher 1 % preferred. 

(2) Seven shares of common of nev corporation 

for X share of Elllot-Fisher common stock of 
either class. 


Beta: 1927 

Undervood 


Elliot-Fisher 


Net Income 

Assets’ 3 

E.P.S. 

Preferred 

Common 


$2, 403, 993 
32,627,518 

$72.84 

5-^3 


$3,973,672 

9,765,677 


$98.37 

5 - 5 * 


2. Olivetti-Undervood (1963) 

(1) As of December 31, 1962, Olivetti had 65. of the stock of 
Undervood. 

(2) Olivetti purchased the rest of the company with cash in 1963. 


(•) Earnings per Share 
(b) Total Assets 


Source: Moody’s Industrial Survey , 1929, 1964. 


168 



the O.S. aarket. In 1961 Olivetti had 65.5 percent of the 
stock of Underwood that it had previously purchased. In 
1963, when Olivetti aerged with Underwood, it paid 
approximately $100 aillion to buy Underwood. At the tine 
of the Berger, Underwood»s took value was almost negative. 
Thus, as aentioned previously, the priaary reason for 
Olivetti paying such a large sua was for the purpose of 
baying a firm that possessed a large aarketing and 
distribution organization in the United States. 

It is iaportant to note that up to this point one has 
* seen two foraer powerful typewriter companies merge into 
large diversified organizations which virtually eliminates 
then froa the typewriter industry. 

The aerger history of Royal was confined to two 
aergers. The first was in 1959 with HcBee and then in 1965 
Boyal was taken over by Litton Industries. HcBee was a 
aanufacturer of special office equipment and office 
machines, filing and housing equipment for accounting firms 
and records and specialized printed products used in 
accounting statistics and qeneral record keeping. Boyal, 
like other typewriter firms, was interested in diversifying 
into the broader office equipment industry. From the data 
in Table VII-5, one observes that Royal was considerably 
larqer than HcBee. For every share of HcBee cannon held 
the holders received 7/8 of a share in Boyal. 

At the tine of the aerger, RcBee's book value was 



TABLE VH-5 

JXNAKCIAL TrEMS OF VARIOUS ROYAL MEF-GIP.S 


I. Litton Industries — Royal-McBee (February 1965) 


Terns: 


(1) Litton issued 201,373 shares of Series A preferred 
stock. 

( 2 ) Litton had previously acquired kv£ of Royal in a cash 
transaction. 

(3) Holders of each share of 4-l/2^ series A preferred 
received one share of Litton $3 cumulative 
eonvertable preferred. Series A. 

w Holders of each common share received 0.16875 shares 
of Litton Series A preferred. 

(5) Royal’s eonvertable subordinate deb. 6 - l/ks, 1977 

were redeemed Dec. 1, 196 k and the 5> Series B, 5-1/2* 
Series C and 6 J Series D preferred stock were 
redeemed October 31, 1964. 


Bata: 


Litton Royal-KcBee 



E.P.S. 

Price 

E.P.S. 

Price 

yr. end 
7-31 





1964 

♦2.77 

79.6-58.2 

$1.04 

16 . 8 - 11.1 

1963 

2.29 

86.7-51.5 

.72 

12.5- 8.8 

1962 

1.64 

74.5-37.3 

.94 

14.8- 7.2 

1961 

I .09 

78.9-41.5 

(.92) 

19.4-10.4 

i 960 

0.82 

44.9-26.8 

.28 

21.4-11.8 


Humber of shares outstanding 

July 31# 1964 — 10 , 508,365 July 31,1963 — 1,538,090 


2. Royal — McBee (July 31, 195*0 

Terms: (l) McBee preferred exchanged share for share for new 
preferred series with same dividend rate. 

(2) McBee common exchanged at a rate of 7/8 share of 
new common for each share held. 


1?0 



TABLE VII-5, continued 


Data: 

Royal KeBee 


a b 



E.P.S. 

Price 

D.P.S. 

E.P.S. 

Price 

D.P.S. 

1953 

$2.32 

$22.4-14.5 

$1.75 

$1.44 

$10.5-8.75 

$ 0.62 

195R 

2.62 

24.2-19.1 

2.00 

1.32 

10.5-8.9 

.45 

1951 

3.88 

26.1-20.4 

2.00 

1 . 6 o 

10.4-7.4 

• 55 

1950 

3.39 

23 . 0 - 18.0 

2.00 

1.43 

11 . 8 - 7.2 

• 52 


(a) Earnlrwr* per Shsre 

(b) Dividends per Sharo 


Source: Moody's Industrial Survey, 1966 , 1955. 


171 



$4.7 aillion. Osinq average aarket prices for the year, 
Boyal paid $5.3 aillion for HcBee.This fiqure is very close 
to the book value of HcBee, and the difference could be 
contributed to the use of average market prices. In 1954 
HcBee had a Price/Earninqs ratio of 5.2 compared to a P/E 
ratio of 9.6 for Royal and 12.0 for the Dow Jones 
Industrial Averaqe. Both firos were below the average, 
which night indicate that investors were not optimistic 
about the qrowth potential of either fin. After tha 
aerqer, Boyal was no lonqer solely a aanufacturer of 
typewriters but was now part of the office equipment 
industry. 

By the tine Litton acquired Royal, the net income of 
the company had becoae quite unstable. This is also 
evidenced in the earnings per share data for Royal. In 
1965 Boyal had a Price/Earninqs ratio of 13 compared to a 
P/E ratio of 20 for Litton and 19.7 for the Dow Jones 
Industrial Averaqe. As evidenced by this data, the aerqer 
of the two firas combined one firm with qood qrowth 

potential and one that had sales and earnings instability. 
Boyal had a book value of $40 aillion. Litton issued 
201,373 shares of Series A preferred for the purchase of 
Boyal at an averaqe price of $125. This amounted to $23.2 

Billion for the coapany. Litton had already acquired 41 

percent of the stock of Boyal in previous cash 

transactions. Thus, Litton purchased Royal for an aaount 


172 



equal to the book value of Boyal. 

As a large diversified corporation Litton wanted to 
■ove into the office equipment industry. Unfortunately 
Royal was technologically far behind in the development of 
an electric typewriter. And as a result, technological 
deficiencies are the basic problems facing Litton and Royal 
at the present time. With the merger of Royal and Litton 
in 1965, the typewriter industry virtually disappeared as 
an independent entity. 

The Remington Typewriter Company went throuqh two 
* significant mergers. The first was in 1927 when Remington 
Typewriter Company merged with Rand-Kardex-Bureau. Rand 
nanufactured and distributed visible recordinq equipment, 
index systems and filinq cabinets. Data on the companies 
at this time was scarce. Asset size figures are qiven in 
Table VII-6. Remington was the largest of the two with a 
book value of $30 million compared to $20 million for Rand. 
However, the Price/Earninqs ratio was 11.4 for Rand 
compared to 5.5 for Reminqton -- nearly twice as large. 
Data was unavailable to compare these figures to the Dow 
Jones Industrial Average. 

This was basically a merger of two firms of equal 
size. It was the first in a series of mergers that would 
combine typewriter firms with office equipment firms. 

Then in 1955 Remington-Rand merged with the Sperry 
Corporation which produced a variety of speciality designed 


173 



TABLE VH-6 


FINANCIAL TEEMS OF VARIOUS SPERRY-RAND MERGERS 


Remington 




ter Co. — Rand Kardex Bureau (Jan. 25, 1927 


1 15/100 share of Remington Rand 1st preferred 
for each share of Remington 1st preferred. 

1 15/100 share of Remington Rand 2nd preferred 
for each share of Remington 2nd preferred. 

4-1/2 shares of Remington Rand common for each 
share of Remington common. 

1 share of Remington Rand 1st preferred for 
each share of Rand 7> preferred. 

2 shares of Remington Rand common for each share 
of Rand common held. 


Total Assets as of December 1926 


Terms: 

(2) 3-1/4 shares of common of Sperry-Rand for each 
share of Sperry common held. 

(3) 2 shares of common of Sperry-Rand for each 
share of Remington-Rand common held. 

Bata: (For the year 1955) 

Reoington-Rand Sperry Corp. 


B.P.S. 

D.P.S. 

Price Range of 
Common 
Humber of 
Shares of 
Cocmon 


58.9-31.25 


5 , 163,523 


*45.9-34.5 


4,343,590 


Source: Moody*!) Industrial Survey, 1928, 1956. 





TABLE VII-7 


TERMS OF PURCHASE FOR POST 1930 MERGERS 


1954 


1955 


1958 


1963 


1965 


Royal Purchases McBee 

Book Value of McBee 

Market Price paid for McBee 

Remington-Rand and Sperry Merge 

Book Value of Remington-Rand 

Book Value of Sperry 

Price paid in excess of Book 
for Remington-Rand 

Price paid in excess of Book 
for Sperry 

Smith-Corona mergers with Marchant 

Book Value of Marchant 

Price paid for Marchant 

Olivetti purchases Underwood 

Book Value of Underwood 

Price paid for Underwood 

By 1961 Olivetti had 65.5% 
of the stock 

Litton purchases Royal-McBee 
Book Value of Royal 
Price paid for Royal 
Litton had 41% of the stock 


$ 4.7 million 
$ 5.3 million 

$ 97 million 

$ 243 million 

$ 153 million 

$ 141 million 

$ 13 million 

$ 20 million 

$ 47,000 
$ 100 million 


$ 40 million 
$23.2 million 


175 



and patented instruments for aeronautical, naval, 
industrial and agricultural application. 

In terns of sales, total assets and net incone Sperry 
Corporation was larger than Benington-Rand. This is also 
verified by the per share data. The book value of Sperry 
was $234 aillion compared to $97 aillion for 
Henington-Rand. The terms of the nerger were such that 
Sperry was paid $141 aillion above book value while 
Benington-Rand received $153 million above book value. 
Beaington had a Price/Earnings ratio of 12.5 compared to a 
P/E ratio of 6 for Sperry and 14.1 for the Dow Jones 
Industrial Average. The high P/E ratio perhaps in part 
explaines the reason for Remington-Rand getting a higher 
amount in excess of book value than Sperry Corporation. 

This was the first non-related product 
diversification nove aade by a typewriter company. 
Following the fornation of Sperry-Rand each of the other 
typewriter companies merged vith a corporation or 
corporations that were also in non-related product lines. 

Thus each of the typewriter companies underwent a 
series of mergers that eventually led them to a corporate 
structure that results in nono of then remaining as a sole 
aanufacturer of typewriters. 


D. .financial Histories oj fouj fiajof lingwriter Companies 



These chanqes, alonq vith economic fluctuations in 
the economy as a whole, are reflected in the financial 
histories of each of the individual companies. In the 
following five figures, some salient features of the 
financial history of the four typewriter companies, which 
were the main specialized typewriter companies in the 
industry, are traced. Fiqures VII-1 through VII-5 show the 
relationships of sales, total assets, net income, net worth 
and the rate of return on investment over time for each of 
the four companies. Sales data are taken at the retail 
level, net income is defined as earnings after taxes and 
net worth is defined as the combination of the accounts of 
capital stock, capital surplus and retained earninqs. In 
the Appendix,Data Table VII-1 presents data on Remington 
Band and its successor companies. Data are presented on 
sales, total assets, net income, net worth and the ratio of 
net income to net worth. Compound annual qrowth rates are 
calculated for specific time segments. The first time 
sequent covers most of the 1930's. This period was 
dominated by the qeneral recession in the early part of the 
decade and relatively slow growth rates in the second part. 
Growth rates for Reminqton Rand during this period were 
actually neqative. The fifteen year period starting in 
1940 was a period of relatively favorable growth, 
approximating 12 1/2 percent to 13 percent in each of the 
categories. This strong performance was the basis for 



FIGURE VII-1 


SALES PATTERN'S OF THE FOUR 
TRADITIONAL TYPEWRITER COMPANIES 
(Dollar Araounts in Millions) 






FIGURE VII-1 
(Continued) 


(*) This symbol refers to the time of a major acquisition 

1954 Royal purchases McBee 

1955 Remington-Rand and Sperry Merge 
1958 SCM purchases Marchant 

This symbol is used in Figures VII-1 through VII-5 
and refers to the above mergers. 


179 




180 








FIGURE VII-2 
(continued) 


(a) Data was negative in these years 


181 



182 


riGURE VII-3 


NET INCOME PATTERNS OF THE FOUR 
TRADITIONAL TYPEWRITER COMPANIES 
(Dollar Amounts in Millions) 













184 


r igur vi 1-5 

RATE or RETURN PATTERNS OP THE TOUR 







merger under farorable teres with the Sperry Gyroscope 
Company. Subsequent growth rates continued to be at about 
the same rate as the economy as a whole except for net 
income, for which there was virtually no growth during the 
decade following the Sperry Rand merger. 

Data Table TII-2 in the Appendix presents a similar 
history for L.C. Smith and the Smith-Corona Companies. The 
decade of the 30's was characterized by negative growth 
rates. Tor the eleven years ending in 1951, growth rates 
were above 10 percent. For the four year period, 1952 
through 1956, growth rates were sharply reduced. In 1956 
the merger with the Harchant Company took place followed by 
a heightened diversification program. 

The Underwood Company had a very successful 
typewriter and was a strong element in the industry up to 
the 1920's. Again, its performance for the decade of the 
1930's represented negative growth rates in most 
categories. Like the other companies Underwood experienced 
positive growth rates in some of the financial categories, 
but experienced a negative growth rate in earnings during 
the fifteen year period between 1990 and the immediate 
post-war period. In fact the Underwood Typewriter Company 
did not experience a positive growth rate in net income in 
any of the five time periods for which growth rates and net 
income were calculated. Its net income performance peaked 
in 1929 when the company earned a net income of over $7 


185 



■illion. Underwood did not reach a level of earnings as 
high as the $7 aillion achieved in 1929 in any following 
year. Its sales continued to grow over the long period of 
years beginning in 1933 for which sales were given. 
Indeed, in the last year of its operation as an independent 
coapany in 1962, its sales reached approximately $100 
aillion. However, on sales of $100 million, it experienced 
a loss of over $8 aillion. Its aost disastrous year was in 
1960 when, on sales of some $79 millions, it suffered a 
loss of $26 aillion, representing about a third of sales 
'and 160 percent of its net worth in 1960. 

The Royal Typewriter Company was also strong in the 
early years. It was one of the few companies which 
experienced a positive growth in sales and net income 
during the decade of the 30's. Its growth during the 
fourteen year period between 1990 and 1954, however, was 
strong in all categories except net income for which 
virtually no growth was experienced. After the merger with 
HcBee and through 1964, before the acguisition by Litton 
Industries, the Royal Typewriter Company experienced growth 
at about half the rate of Gross National Product, and both 
its sales and total assets suffered a downward trend in net 
income amounting to an average compounded of about 7 
percent decline per annum. 

E. IIPJfitabiJLity Per|pjcaacce of ihe Hajor Upewsltep 


186 



TABLE VII- 8 


PROFIT RATE OH EQUITY (AFTER INCOME TAXES) FOR THE 
POUR DOMINANT FIRMS.IN THE TYPEWRITER INDUSTRY 


Realngton-Rand 

Royal 

Underwood 

L.C. Smith 

2.8 
7.7 (b) 
9 >) 
N. A. 

1925-29 

11.3 

7.4 

7.4 

1930-34 

1.9 

1.5 

6.2 

(4.6) 

1932-36 

.3 

9.1 

8.4 

.1 

1936-40 

15.5 

23.9 

14.6 

8.9 

1947-51 

22.7 

21.7 

14.4 

13.0 

1952-56 

l4.8< d) 
11*5 
( .4) 

6.8 

1957-61 1962-66 

2.7 4.4^ 

( 58 * 6 ) --- 

>) 7 . 8 oo 

Average 








1.4 m 6.1 

(I8.6) (s) 

(unweighted) 

(a) 1923-1925 

6.7 

8.7 

1.0 

4.5 

15.7 

18.0 

8.2 


(b) 1924-1925 

(c) 1927-1929 

(d) 1952-1955 

(e) 1962-1964 

(f) Without Underwood 

(g) Includes Underwood 

(h) For 3CM Corporation 

Source: (1936-40, 1947-51) Bain, Joe S., Barriers to New Competition (Cambridge: Harvard University 
Press, 1956 ) p. 192. 


All other year 3 , Moody's Industrial Survi 



Coapanies 

The financial patterns of the four aajor typewriter 
coapani.es in the D.S. are nirrored also in the 
profitability rates by five-year intervals. These data are 
presented in Table VII-8. Durinq the years 1936-1940, the 
profit rate averaqed 15.7 percent.' Durinq the period 
19*7-1951, the profit rate for the four companies averaqed 
18 percent. These were very stronq and favorable 
profitability records.* 

It is interestinq to note from Table VII-8 that these 
hiqh levels of profitability had never been achieved prior 
to the two tine seqmonts cited, nor subsequent to these two 
tine seqaents. Even durinq the relatively prosperous years 
of the 1920's, for the two five-year intervals of the 
decade of the 1920's, the profit rates were respectively 
6.7 percent and 8.7 percent on net worth. The 
profitability record, particularly for the late 1950's, was 
unfavorable for all coapanies and particularly disastrous 
for Underwood. 

The deterioration in the profitability of the 
old-line typewriter coapanies has another aspect of 
siqnificance. The foreqoinq data on the financial 
performance of the coapanies and the qrowth rates durinq 
the post World War II period pernits a siqnificant 
generalization. When the profitability of the old-line 


188 



typewriter companies declined after the early 1950*s, for 
every coapany a meaningful time seqaent in the period under 
analysis, the qrowth and sales of these companies was not 
Batched by the growth in their investaent in total assets 
or their additions to net worth- When profitability was 
aore favorable, the increase in investaent in total assets 
and in net worth kept pace with the increase in sales 
wolnae. 

A related piece of evidence in this regard was the 
increase in earned surplus of 3.76 percent and the increase 
in qross land, plant and equipment of 2.86 percent in the 
sinqle year between 1938 and 1939, when profitability 
levels were relatively high. 1 

P. Diversification Eff orts by Typew riter C omp a nies 

The profit performance referred to in the previous 
section reflected the major impacts of the qrovth of 
electric typewriter sales. The rise of the electric 
typewriter, its relationship as part of a total information 
processing system, and the development of the data 
processing industry, all had a major part in the 
diversification planning and strategy of four leading U.S. 
firas in the typewriter industry. 

A series of articles reviewed the decline of 
Dnderwood. An article in fojrbos of April 1, 1959, 


189 



commented as follows: 

Three successive lanaqeaeots and five years 
of troubles at typewriter-making Underwood 
Corporation have produced a now familiar pattern: 
constantly hopeful predictions, steadily worse 
results. Last aonth was no exception. Closing 
its books on 1953, Underwood showed still another 
S7.1 aillion deficit on top of the $8 aillion in 
losses piled up in 1956 and 1957.* 

Two years later Underwood was still hawing problems. 
Another Forbe s article had the following dramatic title, 
"Hy Bane was Underwood—Gaze on ay Fate, ye Corporate 
Highty, and take Heed!" 5 The Forbes article and an earlier 
article in Fortune Magazine analyzed, "What Kent Wrong at 
Underwood." 6 One otserration made was that while other 
business aachine companies had an opportunity to learn an 
advanced technology during the war period, Underwood 
■anufactured rifles and thus had little contact with the 
new technology that was appearing. When Underwood 
atteapted to enter the electric typewriter business in the 
1950's, "IBn Had all but Put a Lock on the Door." 7 
Underwood atteapted to enter the computer industry in 1956, 
bnt after spending 18 aonths and $12 aillion, it scrapped 
the project without having achieved a single marketable 
product. 

Olivetti obtained control in 1959 and was interested 
in Underwood in part for soae of its products, but aainly 
for its aarketing organization in the u.S. Lack of an 
effective aarketing organization Bakes it difficult for a 


190 




foreiqn firm to make significant penetration in the United 
States market. As discussed in detain in Chapter IV, in 
dealing with aarketing and distribution systems in the 
typewriter industry, it was indicated that to attempt to 
establish a nationwide marketing and service organization 
by a foreign typewriter company involved tremendous outlays 
with tremendous risks. Olivetti felt that these great 
risks could be avoided by taking over the Underwood 
Coapany. 

However, the costs of attempting to achieve a 
break-even with the Underwood products and effective 
utilization of the Underwood U.S. marketing organization 
turned out to be in excess of $100 million. Thus, the cost 
of attempting to achieve a national aarketing and service 
organization in the U.S. by a foreign company by merger, 
turned out to be of the same order of expense as it would 
have been to attempt to achieve the same thing de novo. 
The financial burden on Olivetti was so great that the 
Olivetti family subsequently lost control of the company.* 

The experience of the Underwood Coapany was 
paralleled by the other three companies. The problems of 
the Royal Typewriter Company were discussed in a 1955 
article in Forbes.* The initial problems of Smith-Corona 
were discussed shortly after the merger with flarchant. 10 
These problems were swamped in part by an extensive 
diversification and acquisition program outlined in Table 


191 



YII-9. Study of the Beminqton-Rand Corporation was 
soaewhat obscured by its favorable profitability record 
qoinq into the aerqer with the Sperry Gyroscope Company. 
Analysts looked with favor on the Sperry Rand aerqer.** 
After analyzinq aspects of the Berger, the Fort une article 
connented on the acquisition by Remington Rand of the 
Eckert Bauchly Coaputer Company in 1951, five years after 
Eckert and Bauchly had completed their ENIAC, a giant 
calculator built for Army Ordnance. The first E-B ONIVAC 
(Dniversal Automatic Computer) was delivered to the Bureau 
* of the Census in 1951. The Fortune article enthused in 
closinq as follows. 

If, on the other hand, the combination of 
Sperry technology and Remington Rand 

merchandising sparks a burst of new progress in 
the development of electronic tools for 
businessmen, then the replacement of one qiant 
corporation for two very biq ones can be easily 
•justified.** 

However, the Sperry Rand Corporation in both the 
typewriter business and the data processing field, went 
tbrouqh some tryinq years. It reached a low ebb of less 
than 4 percent return on net worth in 1963, but made some 
recovery since then, until it achieved a return of 11.35 
percent on net worth in 1967. 

G. Ililua tion of-Divers ific ation Ef forts of the T ype wr iter 
Compa nies 


1 



TABLE VII-9 


CAPSULE HISTORY OF SCM CORPORATION 


1885 

1886 

1887 

1890 

1893 

1900 

1903 


1909 

1910 

1903 

1914 

1915 
1920 

1926 

1933 


Inventor Alexander Brovn interests gun-makers Lyman and Wilbert 
Smith in backing the development of an improved typewriter. 

The Smith brothers introduce a typewriter that writes in upper 
and lower case letters. 

Smith-Premier Typewriter Company formed by the Smiths. 

Offices accept the typewriter. 

Smith-Premier merges with four other typewriter makers to farm 
the Union Typewriter Company. Smiths became executives. Smith- 
Premier retained as brand name. 

A visible typewriter invented that lets the typist see what is 
being typed; previously, all typewriters wrote in such a vgy 
that typing couldn't be seen. 

Smith Brothers resign from Union Typewriter Company in a dispute 
over producing a visible typewriter. They organize the L.C.Smith 
and Brothers Company, produce two visible models, and introduce 
such staples as two-color ribbon, built-in tabulators, stencil 
cut, and interchangeable platens. 

The Standard Typewriter Company is organized to make a portable, 
the 6-pound Folding Bar Visible. 

Standard introduces its second model, calls i the Corona. 

Merchant Brothers make the first American calculators in Oakland, 

California. 

Marchant incorporates, builds a factory. 

Standard Typewriter changes its name to Corona Typewriter Company 

Marchant develops the first electric calculator. 

Marchant Introduces first full-keyboard calculator. Chief 
engineer is Carl Friden, who later made a well known calculator 
bearing his name. 

L.C. Smith and Corona Typewriter Companies merge. Corona lead, 
in sales of portables; L. C. Smith in office typewriters. 

Merchant introduces the quiet planetar (or continuous motion) 
calculator mechanism. 


193 



TABLE VII-9 , Continued 
CAPSULE HISTORY OF SCM CORPORATION 


19^5 Bnerson Mead, 29, organizes his own company. Mead Manufacturing. 

19^9 Mead sells his company, joins Kleinschmidt Laboratories. 

1956 Smith-Corona acquires Kleinschmidt Labs, and Emerson Mead. 

1958 Smith-Corona buys Miller-Bryant-Pierce (ribbons and carbons), 
British Typewriters, Ltd., and Marchant Calculators. Smith- 
Corona-Marchant incorporates; sales for year are $87 million. 
Starts to sell wet copiers. 

i 960 Bnerson Mead is elected president of Smith-Corona-Marchant, Inc. 
Sales:$93 million. 

* 1961 Sells Miller-Bryant-Pierce to Columbia Ribbon and Carbon. Enters 
the data processing field with TVpetronic line of small scale 
equipment. Buys the St. Louis Microstatic Company (electrostatic 
copiers). Enters into a cooperative agreement with the Diehl 
Calculator Company of West Germany. 

1962 Changes its name to SCM Corporation. Sells its first 
electrostatic copiers. Sales: $103 million. 

1965 Sales: $200 million. Claims Ho. 2 spot in copiers. 

1966 SCM buys Proctor-Silex (appliances), Proctor and Schwartz, and 
L. and V. Machine. 

1967 Purchases Shetland (floor polishers, scrubbers) and Lewyt 
(vacuum cleaners). Merges with Gliaden Company (paints, chemicals, 
and food.) Acquires Allied Paper (printing and copier papers). 
Sales: $705 million. 

1 968 Disposes of data pirocessing operation to Control Data. Sales for 

fiscal 1968 : $ 7^5 million. 

1969 Sales goal: $900 million. 


Source 


"SCM Calculates Its Future, 
November 1968, p. k$. 


Modern Office Procedures 



The pattern of diversification strategy of the 
typewriter companies followed a similar pattern among all 
four of the coapanies. The nature of this pattern of 
diversification has been summarized in the following terns 
by a foraer research economist with Stanford Research 
Institute after extensive study of - diversification patterns 
of coapanies in a number of industries in the post-war 
period. 


During the 1950's, most of the major firms 
in the typewriter and office machines industry 
fully recognized the trend toward automation of 
information handling—especially as it related to 
the use of electronic computers. They concluded 
that their major role in the economy was that of 
information technology—that their real strength 
was in selling sophisticated hardware to business 
firms through a well developed and highly skilled 
sales force. They were wrong, not because they 
weren't in fact in the business of selling 
equipment used in processing information, but 
rather because they failed to identify their 
major marketing and technical strengths. 


Growth aspirations were being thwarted by 
lower cost foreiqn made machines in the portable 
typewriter field and by the IBM electric in the 
standard model. They countered both by aoving 
production abroad and by introducing electrics of 
their own, but these moves came tco late. To 
meet qrowth aspirations they all decided to 
div ersify—but in what direction? Doth Koyal and 
Underwood decided to move into the computer field 
where RCA, IBM, Burroughs and Remington Rand wore 
already well entrenched. The reasoning went 
something like this. Our industry is moving 
toward a systems approach to information 
processing. If we are to survive and grow, w<« 
should offer a complete line of equipment. Tim 
typewriter is destined to be but a small part of 
this total system so we should diversify into tho 


195 



qrowing parts of this information technology 
industry. Horeover, since the computer will be 
central in these new systeas and its sale will 
control the sale of peripheral equipment, we 
should have our own computer system to protect 
sales of other items of equipaent we already 
produce. 


Existing marketing strengths were 
considered highly relevant to- the selling of 
information systems. They were not. The people 
within a firm who buy typewriters and small 
office nachines are not the same as those who buy 
coaputer systems. The typewriter firms had 
little experience in selling to scientists, 
engineers and operations analysts whose 
recommendations are weighted heavily in the 
decision to buy a particular coaputer system. 
Thus, there was very little, if any synergy to be 
obtained in sellinq computer systems. It is one 
thinq to sell a typewriter to an office manager 
upon a secretary's recommendation. It is 
something totally different to sell a computer 
system to a cost accountant responsible for 
developing decision making information for 
■anageaent. 


As it turned out, the marketing strength 
which the typewriter firms thought they had in a 
hiqhly skilled sales force was no strength at all 
in terms of total information systeas. That was 
mistak e number one. 


The second major mistake in designing a 
diversification strategy was that of concluding 
that, because they had skill in cakinq small 
precision parts and assembling them into complex 
electromechanical devices, they could make the 
additional step into electronic circuitry desiqn 
with relative ease. When I say relative ease, I 
mean with sufficient ease so as to be able to 
desiqn a computer and sell it at a profit. 


Since they did not have the electronics and 
design skill they decided to acquire it. 


19 6 




■oyal-HcBee entered a joint venture with General 
Precision and Underwood acquired Electronic 
Computer Corporation. Both organizations qreatly 
underestimated the costs of continuing research 
and development expenditures required to stay in 
the computer industry, both firms saw their 
accumulated earned surplus beinq eroded away by 
heavy 8 6 D expenditures, and by 1965, both firms 
had disappeared a separable corporate 
identities. 13 


In the foreqoinq analysis. Professor Hason is arquinq 
that the typewriter companies faced a difficult dilemma. 
The strenqth of the manual typewriter companies was in 
their marketing and service organizations for manual 
typewriters that had been technoloqically by-passed and had 
moved into the declininq phase of the life cycle of their 
sales, attempts to apply the marketinq orqani 2 ation to the 
broader area of information systems was not a comparative 
advantaqe, but rather a comparative deficiency in competinq 
with the marketinq and service organizations developed by 
companies with a stronqer technological base. 

i second error common to many companies in attempting 
to diversify into the electronic data processing field was 
failure to understand the tremendous costs of developing a 
marketable computer and failure to recognize that a 
separate sales and service organization would be required 
to achieve an effective distribution system for computers. 
This latter problem was similar to that faced by foreign 
typewriter companies in attempting to enter tho O.S. 


197 



■arket. For effective market coverage, a nationwide 
■arketinq and service organization was required. Put 
without sales in larqe volume throughout the country, the 
per unit cost of research and developnent and the requisite 
■arketinq and service organization sake the resulting 
product price so high as to be non-competitive, or at 
competitive prices resulted in serious losses. 

As a consequence of the iapact of technological 
chanqe and the innovation of the electric typewriter and 
the resulting narket developments, the effects on the 
* traditional typewriter conpanies were severe. As a result, 
none of the oriqinal "pure typewriter companies" in the 
United States have survived as an independent company. 
Thus, the U.S. typewriter industry as it existed even 15 
years aqo has disappeared. The manufacturing of portable 
typewriters, while still conducted by American companies, 
has been shifted to a considerable degree to foreiqn 
subsidiaries. Local manufacturing operations are carried 
on as relatively small divisions of larqe diversified 
companies. This is the threshhold that has been reached. 
In the following chapter, an assessment of the educational 
■arket for typewriters is made. 


198 



FOOTNO TES TO C HAPTER VII 


1. Brace B liv en. The Wonde rful Writing Machine (New lork: 
Random House, 1954) p. 95. 


2. Similarly hiqh returns were found in the Federal Trade 
Commission study of 1941. For 1939, the average return for 
10 companies was 11.8 percent on average net worth employed 
for the year. The ranqe of returns was from 6.1 percent to 
36.9 percent with four of the companies earning 15.6, 16.1, 
19.6, and 36.9 percent respectively. Six of the companies 
earned returns ranging from 6.1 percent to 10.3 percent. 
See, U.S. Federal Trade Commission, Ind ustrial Corporation 
Reports : Business Machines and Xipewriper Manufacturing 

Corporati ons (Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 
' February 25, 1941) p. 5. 


3. Federal Trade Commission, Industrial Corporation 
Reports. Business Machines and Typewriter Manufacturing 
Corporations, February 25, 1941, pp. 9-10. 


4 . "That Corner Again," Forbes. Vol. 83 (April 1, 1959) p. 
40 . 


5. Forbes . Vol. 92 (July 1, 1963) p. 15. 


6. Fortune . September, 1960, p. 141ff. 


7. forb es. July 1, 1963, op. cit., p. 15. 


8. Walker Gu 2 zardi Jr., "Olivetti’s Crisis of Identity," 
ZStifl-DS ( July 1967) pp. 92ff. This article was a more 
sober appraisal of Olivetti’s prospects, following by seven 
years an earlier article entitled, "Olivetti: Elegant and 
Tough," Fortune (September 1960) pp. 137£f. 


9. "Royal Road," Eorbes, Vol. 76 (November 15, 1955) p. 

30 . 


199 




10. "Costly Herqer," Forbes. Vol. 82 (October 1, 1958) p. 

25. 


11. Edaund L. Van Deusen, "The 2- Plus 2 of Sperry Hand," 
Fortune (Auqust 1955) pp. 88ff. 


12. Ibid .. p. 128 

13. R. Hal Hason, Hineoqraphed Lecture on Diversification 
ot OCLA Executive Proqraa, Sprinq 1968, pp. 23-25. 


200 



APPEKDIX VII-I 


R.C. Allen 

Still manufacturers typewriters. 


Corona 


Merged with L.C. Smith, 1926. 


Densnore 


Formed with Onion Typewriter in 1893. Taken over by 
American Vritinq Hachine Company in 1907. Dropped by that 
‘organization in 1910 and disappeared by 1912. 


Elliot-Fisher 1903-1928 


Merged with Underwood in 1928. 


Hammond 1P80-1923 


Was a successful producer of typewriters up to 1923. How 
it is known as the Var-Typer (an electric machine used to 
sct up copy to be reproduced by photolitho graphic process. 


Keystone 1899-|903 


ncrqed with Elliot-Fishcr in 1903. 
{Jonarch 


Formed with Union Typewriter Company in 1693. Sold by 
nonarch Typewriter Company in 1908. Ceased operations 
before World War I. 


RoiseJess 


201 





Purchased by Reminqton in 1924. 

Re ming ton 1874- present 

Still exists as part of Sperry Band. 

B oyal 1904-'present 

Still exists as part of Litton Industries. 

L.C. Smith 

Still exists as part of SCR. 

Smith Pr emi er 

Part of L.C. Smith. 

Underwood 1895 - present 

Still exists as part of Olivetti-Underwood. 

Y ost 1079-1918 

Formed Union Typewriter Company in 1893. fiy the end of 
World War I it was no lonqer beinq sold. 


202 




APPENDIX VII~II 


Acae 1911-1915 (approximate) 


This typewriter, invented by Zalmon G. Sholes, son of the 
faa ous typewriter inventor C. Lathaa Sholes, was first 
called the "Waterbury Standard Visible". It retailed for 
$50.00. 


A lexande r 1907-1914 


This typewriter, oriqinally desiqned in 1907 in Endicott, 
H.T., was moved from one city to another in the United 
States and finally in Enqland where a British munitions 
works nanufactured it for a few years. It was a four-bank, 
sinqle-shift, liqht weiqht typewriter. 

America n 1893-1915 


This typewriter, first introduced in 1B93, was also 
manufactured in Enqland as the Globe. 


A tlas 1915-1917 


This typewriter was introduced in 1910 but had a very 
• short life. Curinq World War I it went off the market. 


Ba rloc k 1914-1926 


The Tarlock typewriter was introudced from Great Britain 
to the United States in 1914. It is related to the 
Columbia, a typewriter company whoso patents were purchased 
at the time the Barlock was introduced to the U.S. Its 
manufacture was returned to Enqland in 1918. 


1910-1915 


This little machine 
Harrisburq, Pennsylvania. 


was first market in 1910 in 
It sold for $ IB.00. 


203 



Blake 1905-1909 


This machine, formerly known as the Manhattan, was 
manufactured in Newark, Hew Jersey. 


Brooks 1887-1912 


This machine, manufactured in New York City, was noted for 
its stall number of parts and light weight. 


Ne w Century 1900- 1906 


The full name of this typewriter is New Century Caligraph. 
It vas manufactured by the American Writing Machine Company 
% j.n Bridgeport, Connecticut. 

Chicago 1897-1917 


This typewriter was formally known as the Munson. Jt had 
48 styles of type available on interchangeable wheels. 

Commercial Visible 1907-1915 


This 28-key double-shift typewriters was introduced in 
1898. It had but 288 parts and was one of the simplest 
writing machines ever devised. 


gram 1907-1908 


This combination writing and adding machine was introduced 
in New York. It had a very short life. 


Cr anda ll 1879-1899 


This machino was manufactured in Groton, N.T. At the time 
of its introduction, it was a type wheel typewriter. Later 
models had type bars. 


204 




Crown 1887-1900 


This typewriter was manufactured in Albany, N.Y. It had a 
word counter as an integral part of the mechanism, and 
retailed for 520.00. 


Darling 1910-1915 


This was a pocket sized toy typewriter. In many markets 
in Europe it was sold as the Trebla. 


Type-A dder 1920-1925 


This was an attachment to a standard typewriter in the 
form of an extremely compact adding and subtracting 
'machine. It was manufactured in Hew York, N.Y. 


Daugherty 1C90-1910 (approximate) 


A completely visible typewriter manufactured in Kittaning, 
Pennsylvania, that sold with cover for 575.00. 


Demountable 1921-1927 


This typewriter, with interchangeable frame, carriage and 
action, was manufactured in Fond du Lac, Wisconsin. 


BPllax 1903-1910 


This typewriter was manufactured by Robert Ingersoll S 
Brothers. It was one of a series of typewriters for the 
use by children as toys. Others in the series carried 
names such as Baby Practical, Little Giant, and Simplex. 


1895-1900 


Hanuf actnred in Dos Floinos, Iowa, the Duplex never 
achieved ouch acceptance. 


205 



Edland 1894-1900 


Hanufactured in New York City, the Edland was a wheel-type 
aachine. 


Slli s 1910-1920 


This was a complete adding, billing and partial accounting 
aachine. It had a typewriter as well as an adding machine 
keyboard. 


Emerson 1907-1910 


This typewriter had an unusual rotary type bar action. In 
1910 it was purchased by Hr. Sears of Sears Roebuck and 
‘shortley thereafter became the Woodstock typewriter. 


Essex 1890-1900 


This partially visible typewriter was manufactured in New 
York, N.Y. It had very limited acceptance. 

Fay-Sh oles 1905-1908 


This blind typewriter was an outgrowth of the 
Renington-Sholes. The same Rcminqton was reomvud from the 
original name because of court litigation. In 1908 it 
became part of the Remington Company. 


fe dera l 1919-1923 


This typewriter was manufactured by the Federal Adding 
Fachino Company who purchased the Yisiqraph Typewriter 
Company and the C. Spiro Ranufacturina Company to acquire 
manufacturing riqhts. The Federal was sold to the Hauaond 
Typewriter Company. 


191$ 1895-1905 


20 6 




This typewriter was manufactured in Sew Tort. It was 
introudced in France as the Hurtu and sold in Sermany as 
the Knoch. 


Fou nta in 1905-1910 


This was a low priced typewriter with a typewheel and a 
universal keyboard sold by a Sew York department store. 


£gx 1902-1921 


This typewriter was first introduced as a blind writer anrl 
as a visible writinq machine in 1906. Several standard and 
portable models were introduced before the typewriter went 
off the market. 


Fra nklin 1900-1905 


This typewriter was manufactured in New York and had a 
visible printinq point. 


Gail>el2 1919-1923 


This typewriter was manufactured in Chicago. It was a 
portable nodel veiqhinq only 5 and one-half pounds with 
case. The company went into bankruptcy in 1923 and the 
Oliver Typewriter Company was appointed as a receiver. 


Harris Vi sible 1907-1923 


This typewriter was manufactured in Fond du lac, Wisconsin 
exclusively for Sears Koehuck. Its name was later chanqed 
to Hex and was manufactured by the Demountable Typewriter 
Company. The Harris Visible became the Hex in 1914. 


Ha rtf ord 1094-1910 


This typewriter was introduced as a blind writinq machine 
in 1H94. It was underpriced and eventually went into 
bankruptcy. 


207 



Hooven 1912-1927 


This automatic typewriter was first introduced as the 
Rational automatic. It used the piano roll principle to 
achieve automatic typewriter operation. It is generally 
considered that this is the forerunner of the Autotypist. 


Intern ational 1889-1900 

This blind typewriter was introduced by Lucien Crandall 
and manufactured in Parish, Sew fork. 


Jackson 1898-1910 

This typewriter was manufactured by the Jackson Typewriter 
Company in Boston. It used an ink pad rather than a 
typewriter ribbon. 


Jewet t 1892-1910 


The oriqinal Jewett was a blind writer. A visible model, 
known as the Jewett Visible, was introduced in 1904. 


J unio r 1907-1915 


This small typewriter, invented by Charles Eennett, was 
manufactured in Sew York. In 1915 it was sold and renamed 
Dennett for its inventor. 


KcCa ll 1898-1910 

This wasn an automatic typewriter first manufactured in 
Columbus, Ohio and then in Xenia, Ohio. It used a 
perforated paper roll as a master for typinq. 


1898-1910 

This typewriter was manufactured by the flanhattan 
Typewriter Company in Now York. It was similar to the 


208 




Reninqton Bodel 2 


Berritt 1899-1905 


This typewriter was introduced by the Lyon Banufacturinq 
Co®pany of Kew York City. It was desiqned for typinq with 
the riqht hand only, the left beinq required for movinq the 
printinq indicator to the desired position. 


Bolle 1918-1922 


This typewriter, manufactured in Antiqo, Wisconsin was 
■idway between a portable and an office typewriter. It did 
not qain much acceptance and the company went bankrupt in 4 
years. 


Boon-Hopkins 1911-1921 


This addinq-typewriter was introduced by the Boon-Hopkins 
Billinq Machine Company. In 1921 it was taken over by 
Burrouqhs. 


f.orris -890-1895 


The florris nachine was introduced in the early 1900’s. 
This typewriter, similar to the Hall, was manufactured by 
the Hoqqson Banufacturinq Company in Hew Haven and sold for 

£15.00. 


Bunson 1890-1917 


This typewriter was first manufactured in Chicaqo. It was 
a typo wheel machine with a universal keyboard. Its name 
was later chanqed to the Chicaqo and finally to Galesburq. 


JSStien-li I 1889-1900 


The national I was an 81 character office size typewriter. 
It was manufactured by the National Typewriter Company in 
Philadelphia. 


209 




BicVerson 1907-1907 


This unusual typewriter had a vertical cylinder. It was 
desiqned in Chicago by a Presbyterian sinister — but never 
reached the market. 


Odell 1900-1910 


This machine, which used an ink pad rather than a 
typewriter ribbon for color, had 79 characters and was 
operated by hand. It was sold at a price approximately 
one-fifth that of a standard typewriter of that era. 
Possibly because of this, Odell had a short, unprofitable 
life. 


* Offici al 1901-1906 


This was a typewheel typewriter with a partially visible 
printing point. It had a non-standard three bank keyboard. 


Oliver 1894-1925 


The Oliver typewriter, invented by Rev. Thomas Oliver in 
Chicaqo was one of the first that had a visible printing 
point. The Oliver enioyed very large sales in the l). S. 
until the piddle twenties when, after Oliver's death, 
principal marketing efforts transferred to Europe. 


Peo ple' s 1893-1897 


This typewriter, also known as the Pearl, was manufactured 
by the Garvin Kachine Company in Hew York. It was a typo 
wheel machine that was operated with one hand on the 
keyboard and the other on the indicator to selected the 
desired character. 


Pit tsh urgh 1898-1913 


This typewriter, formerly known as the Daugherty, was 
■anuractured by the Pittsburgh Writing Company of 
Kittuninq, Pennsylvania. It featured an interchangeable 


210 



type basket and carriage 


Postal 1902-1910 


This portable typewriter was manufactured by the Postal 
Typewriter Company in Sew York. It was a three bank 
keyboard typewriter with a type wheel rather than type 
bars. 


R apid 1890-1900 


The Rapid typewriter, manufactured by the A. W. Sump C 
Company , Dayton, Ohio, featured a four bank keyboard, type 
bars and a visible printing point. 


* Relia nce 1919-1920 


The Reliance Typewriter Company was organized after 
purchasing the assets of the Pittsburgh Visible Typewriter 
Company in 1919. It was sold under several names, 
including Wall Street and Broadway Standard. 


Rex 1916-1923 


This typewriter, manufactured by the Rex Typewriter 
Cowpany of Fond-duLac, Wisconsin, was a visible writer with 
type bars, a three bank keyboard and a double shift action. 


Schiesari 1919-1919 


This typewriter was a word writing machine, designed in 
Turin, Italy. The Syllabic Typewriter Company in New York 
was organized to manufacture this unusual typewriter, but 
the product was never brought to market. 


Secor 1911-1916 


A visible printing point, single shift position and typo 
bars wore features of this typewriter. It was a successor 
to the Williams typewriter and manufactured in Derby, 
Connecticut. 


2U 



Sholes Visible 1909-1912 


This typewriter was introduced by the C. Latham Sholes 
Typewriter flanufacturinq Company of Milwaukee, Wisconsin. 
It was a very slow visible writer and did not enjoy much 
sales volume. 


Stearn s 1908-1915 


Hanufactured by the £. C. Stearns and Company in Syracuse, 
the Stearns was a visible writer with a four bank, sinqle 
shift keyboard. 


Sterling 1911-1914 


A small visible writer with a three bank, double shift 
keyboard, the Sterlinq was manufactured in New York City. 
It was also sold in Great Britain. 


Sun 1885-1925 


Banufactured by the Sun flanufacturinq Company, this 
typewriter was first sold as a stylus operated machine. In 
1901, a front strike, visible model was introduced. The 
typewriter enjoyed considerable popularity and a number of 
different models were introduced. 


Tavlor 1910-1910 

This was an electric typewriter desiqncd by Joseph Tavlor 
of Rochester, Now York. Ho means for marketinq the machine 
was developed and it went off the market in the same year. 


Triw ph 1907-1907 


This machine was first introduced in 1907 in 
City. The factory was in Kenosha, Wisconsin. Tha 
was a visible writer with a lour bank keyboard 
bars. It went into receivership the same year 
introduced. 


•Jew York 
Triumph 
and type 
it was 


212 



Victor 1907-1923 


The Victor Typewriter Company was organized in 1907, a 
successor to the Franklin. It was sold in both the United 
States and Europe until 1919. After that date, it was sold 
exclusively in Europe. 


Iisi3cai>h 1910-19 19 


This machine was manufactured in Sew York City. Durinq 
the nine years that it was sold, it attained respectable 
volume as a visible typewriter. In 1919 manufacturinq 
riqhts wer sold to the Federal Adding Machine Company and 
renamed the Federal. 


Walker 1910-1912 


This was a noiseless typewriter introduced by C. 
Willington Walker of Stamford. It featured a motionless 
carriage. The Walker went off the market in 1912. 


1887-1909 


Invented by John Hewton Williams and manufactured in 
Derby, Conn., the Williams featured type bars mounted half 
in front and half behind the cylinder and a partially 
visible printing point. It went into receivership in 1909 
and was purchased by the Secor Typewriter Company. 


Woodstock 191A-1935 


This typewriter was successor to the old Roebuck and was 
Manufactured in Woodstock Illinois. It attained 
considerable popularity, and during the middle thirties, 
was purchased by the R. C. Allen Adding Machine Company. 
It. C. Allen dealers still aanufacture and sell this 
typewriter. 


KSElil 1886-1900 


2X3 




This toy typewriter, manufactured in 1886 in Boston, was an 
indicator-type machine with type arranged in alphabetical 
order on a revolving disc. 


Yu Ess I 9 I 8 -I 920 


Introduced in America in April 1918, by the manufacturers 
Of the Mignon typewriter of Germany. It was a very slow 
one-hand operated typewriter and never enjoyed much volume. 



Source : The data for this Appendix was supplied by Mr. Wayne 
K. Boulton, Product Analyst for Royal Typewriter Company in 
Hartford, Connecticut. He obtained the data from the 
International Office Equipment llagaxine, Vol. 55 , (New Yorlc: 
Business Equipment Publishing Company, October 1923). This 
represents one of the most complete historical records of 
the early typewriter business in tho United States and is 
a prime reference source for Royal. 



CHAPTER VIII 


THE EDUCATIONAL EARKET FOR TIPEVRITERS 

For several years electric typewriters have dominated 
the large and small office market. Great efforts have also 
been made in the sale of electric typewriters for home use. 
As reported in 1967, less than 30 percent of the homes in 
the O.S. have portable typewriters.* This means that a 
great opportunity exists for the sale of electric 
typewriters in this area. However, both these areas are 
dominated by two firms — IBH in the office electric market 
and SCR in the electric portable market for the hone. 

Bith the market for electric typewriters in the 
educational field the situation is quite different. With 
no one firm dominating the sale of electric typewriters in 
this area one could classify it as an "open field". With 
the large demand for electric typewriters in the office and 
now in the home, the educational field will rapidly be 
shifting from manuals to electrics in the typing classroom. 

These facts would certainly lead the major typewriter 
firms to make large sales efforts in this area. To become 
more familar with this new market, it might be advisable to 
first examine the national scope of this market. 

A. pimen sjon s oj[ the Educational Rajkot 


*15 



The dimension of the educational market for 
typewriters is quite large — both in terns of the number 
of school systems and the enrollment of students within 
each system. Table VIII-1 presents data on the number of 
school districts by geographical area in the U.S. These 
data show that there are over 25,000 school districts in 
the U.S., with the qreatest number occurring in the Great 
lakes and Plains states and the West and Southwest states. 
Table VIII-2 presents data on the number of schools — 
private and public — by grade. One observes that there 
are a larqe number of schools in the secondary system where 
the typewriter firms could make substantial inroads. 

Another area to examine is that of the total 
enrollment fiqures across the nation. Table VIII-3 
presents a breakdown of the enrollment and system fiqures 
by size of enrollment. Over 12 million students are 
enrolled in 170 school systens that have 25,000 students or 
■ore. This would indicate a key area where typewriter 
■anufacturers could concentrated in the sale of their 
electric typewriters. The majority of these systems would 
be in the metropolitan areas. Table VIII-4 further breaks 
the enrollments fiqures down by grade cataqory.Over 13 
■illion students are in grades 9-12 where a qreat deal of 
typewriter education is done. 


21$ 



TABLE VIII-1 


HUffiER OF SCHOOL DISTRICTS AND AVERAGE 
EKROLLMEOT PER DISTRICT I965-I966 



Humber 

Percent 

Average Enrollment 
Per District 

Halted States 

25,933 

100.0 

1,562 

Borth Atlantic 

4 , 00 6 

14.8 

2,463 

Great lakes and 
Plains 

14,744 

54.6 

804 

Southeast 

1,821 

6.8 

5,336 

West and Southwest 

6,412 

23.8 

1,669 


Source: Standard Education Almanac (Los Angeles: Academic Madia, Inc., 

1^68) pTiBj. 


217 



TABLE VHI-2 


PUBLIC ABD PRIVATE SCHOOLS HUMBER 
EC I2VEL 19301966 

Type of School 1366 : 

KLenentary (Excludes Kindergarten) 88,162 

Public 73#4oo 

One Teacher 6,700 

Non Public « 14,762 

« 

Secondary (includes Junior High) 31#144 

Public 26,700 

Hon Public 4,444 

Institutions of Higher Education 2,230 

Public 821 

Private 1,409 


Source: U.S. Departaent of Cocscerce, Bureau of the Census, Statis¬ 
tical Abstract of the U.S., 89 th Edition, 1963# p. 105. 


218 



TABLE VHI-3 


DXSTRXBOTIO'l OF LOCAL SCHOOL SYSTEMS AND 
ENROLLMENTS, BY ENROLLMENT SIZE OF SYSTEM 


FOR THE U.S., FALL I 967 



Enrollment Size 

Hiraber 
of systems 

i 

Enrollment 

* 

Total Operating System 

20,255 

100.0 

43,626,654 

100.0 

Operating System 300 or 
more students 

11,862 

58.6 

42,891,932 

98.3 

25*000 or more 

170 

.8 

12,539,348 

28.7 

10,000-24,999 

529 

2.6 

7,744,636 

17.7 

5,000-9,999 

1,083 

5.3 

7,^50,234 

17.1 

2,500-4,999 

1,941 

9.6 

6,752,568 

15.5 

1,000-2,499 

3,500 

17.3 

5,677,585 

13.0 

600-999 

2,058 

10.2 

1 , 605,072 

3.7 

300-499 

2,581 

12.8 

1,122,489 

2.6 

Operating Systems less 
than 300 students 

8,393 

41.4 

734,662 

1.7 


Source: U.S. Department of Health, Education & Welfare, Office 
of Education, Ed ucation Directory 1967 - 6 B, Fort 2, Public 
School Systems (Wusnincton, D.C.: Coverrment Publications, 
1968 ) p. 6. 


219 



TABLE VIII-4 


SCHOOL E?ffiOLLKSNT AND EXPENDITURE 
B3f TIES OF SCHOOL 1930-1960 
(enrollment In 1,000) 


Total 

54,500 

Grades 1-8 

36,000 

Private 

5,000 

Public 

31,000 

Grades 9-12 

13,000 

Public 

11,700 

Private 

1,300 

Higher Education 

5,526 

Public 

3,624 

Private 

1,902 


Source: U.S. Departcent of Ctt nerce, Bureau of the Census. Statis¬ 
tical Abstract of the U.S. 1968 , 69 th Edition (Washington, D.C. 
U.S. Government Printing Office, 1969 ) p. 105. 


220 



What is important to note is that the number of 
school aqe children is increasing rapidly. This is 
indicated by Table VIII-5 which projects enrollment in the 
first twelve grades to 53.6 Billion by 1975. With more and 
■ore of the students taking typing classes this leans that 
not only is the current market for typewriters large in 
this area but that it is qoing to increase in the 
forthcosinq years. Recoqnizinq this one can examine the 
efforts typewriter manufacturers are making in the 
educational market. 

B. Harketing Effor ts of the Fou r Kajor Typewriter 
Compan ies 

Since the early 1960‘s the major typewriter 
■anufacturers have been making a concentated sales effort 
in the educational market. In the present school typinq 
classrooms one-half of the typewriters carry the Royal 
name. 2 However the vast majority of these are manuals and 
as the "electric fever" takes a tiqhter hold most of the 
■anuals will be replaced. The manufacturers who start 
early in this transition may get a definite head start in 
terms of future sales. 

Data on the typewriter manufacturer's effort in this 
area are scarce. Two firms that have published information 
in this area are Underwood and Royal. 


221 




TABLE VHI-5 


FALL ENROLLMENT, BY ORGANIZATION LEVEL 
OF SCHOOL AND CONTROL, U.S. 1955-1975 
(data In 1,000) 


Tear 

K - 12 

Elementary 

Secondary 

1965 

**3,774 

31,716 

17,028 

1966 

49,770 

32,200 

17,500 

1970 

52,300 

32,200 

20,110 

1975 

53,600 

31,400 

22,200 


Source: Standard Education Almnac (Los Angeles: Academic Media, 

me., 1966 ) p. 152 . 


222 



Xn 1960 Underwood established an Educational Division 
for the "express purpose of guiding, coordinating and 
proaotinq Onderwood's activities with the nations 
schools". 3 The firm sent personal letters and direct mail 
advertising to school officials and Underwood replied to 
all requests for teaching aids. In addition the division 
attended various key business education conventions 
displaying and demonstrating their products. While this 
was qoinq on the educational section developed training 
innovations to help instructors and students. School 
awards and certificates for outstanding achievement by 
students were distributed. Lectures and demonstrations 
were qiven in schools across the nation. 

The net effect from this vast marketing effort was 
that there was a substantial increase in the sale of 
standard manual and electric typewriters for educational 
purposes. This effort has also led to successful sellinq 
of related products such as addinq and calculating machines 
for educational purposes. 

Since the early 1960’s Royal has been conducting 
several research studies on the use of typewriers in the 
education field. One area of emphasis has been the use of 
the portable typewriter as a learning tool at the 
elementary and junior high level. In 1960 a one year study 
was concluded by three major universities under qrants from 
Royal. Their reports indicated: 


223 



... that the typewriter had educational 
value in improvinq work habits, developinq skills 
in Enqlish qtammer, improvinq composition skills, 
inprovinq the speed and quality of handwritinq, 
decreasinq the time needed for written reports, 
and increasinq the quality of written work 
produced in various sub-ject areas. Growinq 
interest has been evidenced by elementary school 
administrations in the potential of the portable 
for classroom use and the company has initiated a 
sales proqram to make portable typewriters and 
specific teachinq aids available for -elementary 
classroon use. * 


Another study was concluded at the Middletown Ohio 
City School District in 1964. This study utilized portable 
typewriters and seventh qrade students. The results aqain 
shoved that portable typewriters helped students in their 
studies.* 

The effort that Royal has made in the educational 
narket can be exemplified by a 1963 survey reported in 
Royal's 1964 Annual Report: 


This survey conducted by independent 
researchers, covered biqh schools with 
enrollments of over 2,100 in the state of 
Indiana. The findinqs showed that the schools 
preferred Royal manual and electric typewriters 
for their classrooms by almost 4-1 over any other 
make. Royal also was named by 3 to 1 over the 
nearest rival as the typewriter which was the 
■ost trouble free repair wise. * 


Hhether typewriter manufacturers conduct research 
studies in various school systems or whether larqa 


224 



aark“tinq efforts are made in the educational aarkets the 
results are the sate. Typewriter aanufacturers that Bake 
stronq sales and aarketinq efforts in this area will 
undoubtedly be aakinq stronq inroads into the future 
aarket. When .the field starts switching to electric 
typewriters it Bay well be that these firas will be in the 
front runninq. 

To qet a clear picture of what is actually happeninq 
in the current aarket for electric typewriters one can 
exaaine the experience of the Los Angeles School Systea 
with electrics. 

C. Hark et Characteri s tic s of the L.A. Sch ool System - 

The Los Angeles City School Systea is the second 
larqest in the nation with 620,300 students compared to New 
lork with 1,074,000 students and Chicago with 548,000 
students. Table YIII-6 qives the enrollaent figures for 
those students taking typing classes in junior and senior 
hiqh in the L.A. systea durinq the Spring of 1968. Of the 
620,300 students enrolled in the L.A. system roughly 46,000 
take typinq classes each semester or nearly 96,000 
annually. This does not consider the enrollaent in summer 
sessions since the data was not available. 

Another important aspect of this analysis is the 
nuaber of aachines it takes to supply the students. This 


225 



SABLE VHI-6 


EKBOUU5E3T IS LOS ANGELES SCHOOL 

SYSTEM, SHUUG 1968 

Humber of Students 

Jtacior Hi(^i School 


Personal Typing I 

2 d, 308 

Special Schools 

346 

Personal Typing n 

A, 881 

Special Schools 

93 

Typing Service (Office Help) 

351 

TOTAL 

23,979 

Senior Eifdi School 


Personal Typing I 

9,500 

Personal Typing II 

6,195 

Personal Typing III 

2,878 

Personal Typing IV 

867 

Office Procedures I 

1,632 

Office Procedures II 

2,014 


TOTAL 23,083 


Source: Reports of Subjects end Enrollments- junior end Senior 
Hlffr ScBooX—for Lprlr..-; Semester lyoci (Los Angeles: Division of 
Secondary Education and Keusuresent and Evaluation Section, i960). 


226 



data is shown in Table VIII-7. Bithin the 120 schools in 
the L.A. systen thece are lb,728 machines that are used in 
the classroom. The use of these machines is quite 
extensive. These typewriters are used 6 periods a day 5 
days a week and b niqhts a week with the adult classes. 
There is an extensive niqht program for adults in the L.A. 
systen. 

One of the aost inportant features in buying 
typewriters for the city systen is the price. All buyinq 
of typewriters is by "low-bid". This neans that price 
* competition plays a dominant role in this situation. The 
city school system does all of its own naintenance of 
typewriters with few exceptions. And the L.A. school 
systen never buys used typewriters. 

With such a larqe number of typewriters — mostly 
aanuals — in the school system, it would seem that a great 
opportunity exists for typewriter firms — selling 

electrics -- to make larqe inroads into this narket when 

the real shift to electrics start. One of the more 

inportant factors to remember in any sale of electric 

typewriters to the L.A. school systen are the special 
requirenents and characteristics of that market. 

D. Extent of EJgstrif ica tion irj the L.A. School Sy ste m 

Of the 120 junior and senior high schools in the 


227 



TABLE VHI-7 


HUGER OF TYPEWRITERS IN L.A. 

CIEf SCHOOL SYSTEM 

Humber of Typewriters 


Jtmlor High School 


72 schools — average 2 classrooms 
with 50 machines each 

7,200 

Senior Hi^i School 


48 schools — average 2 classrooms 
with 50 machines each 

4,800 

Office Procedures 12th grade — 

1,728 

36 machines per school 



Additional Classrooms (junior and Senior High) 


One-third of the schools have an 2,000 

additional classroom — 40 schools 
with 50 machines each 


TOTAL 14,728 


Source: Data obtained in a telephone interview with Mr. Bart Wigge, 
Head of the Business Education Department, Los Angeles City 
School System on July 16, 196J. 


228 



systea there are only four senior high schools that have 
electric typewriters. Each of the four high schools have 
one classroon each that is electrified. Each classrooa has 
50 aacbines which leans that out of 14,728 aachines used in 
the classrooas only 200 or 1.36 percent are electric 
typewriters. 

These machines are basically - for experimental 
purposes. One of the rooms is provided with fifty IBtl 
electrics and another room with fifty Royal electrics. The 
funds for these 100 aacbines were provided by the federal 
governaent under the Vocation Education Act. The other two 
classrooas contain 100 Olivetti-Underwood electric 
typewriters.These typewriters were financed through 
district funds. At one time the L.A. City School System 
had a fifth classrooa equiped with fifty SCB 250 models. 
However, these aachines didn't hold up so the system 
disposed of them. 

At present IBB sales are qeared to the selectric and 
since used eguipaent is not accepted the IBB 500 electric 
is not used in this school system. It is interesting to 
note that of the electrics in the classroon 
Olivetti-Onderwood has 50 percent of the aarket. The 
dominant factor for Olivetti-Underwood's lead is that the 
school systea buys froa the company that subaits the lowest 
bid. Olivetti-Underwood has always been able to aeet this 
requireaent and since their aachines aeet the school 


229 



specifications they usually get the bid. At first the 
Olivetti-Onderwood Scripter was used, but now the systea 
uses the Olivetti-Underwood 700 electric. 

Since the school system has its own aaintenance 
department no service contracts are needed. Of the four 
different types of machines used most have not caused any 
trouble. For awhile the school system repaired the IBtl 
selectrics, but since they took so long to fix the systea 
finally signed a maintenance contract with IBH. As was 
stated before the SCH 250 didn’t hold up under constant 
usage. As a conseguence the school system will not buy any 
portable aachines or compact electrics. Nothing less than 
a full standard office electric machine will be purchased 
when the purchase of an electric typewriter is aade. 

The reasons why a school system would want to buy 
electrics is an important consideration. One of the major 
reasons is the continued trend of electrics in the office 
and in the hoae. It is sometimes felt that students 
schould be instructed on machines similar to what they will 
use later. Another consideration is that there is less 
fatigue on an electric typewriter. However it is 
interesting to note that after testing the electric verses 
the annual there is no clear evidence that students laarn 
to type any quicker on an electric as conpared to a manual 
■achine. And that no one electric model stcod out to be 
significantly better than any other typewriter. So it 


230 



would seew that the wain criteria for baying electrics are 
price and durability. 

As evidenced by the previous sections it would seen 
apparent that the shift to electrics has not taken hold in 
this school system. However it is certainly forth coainq. 
There still are a lot of aanuals bought for the school 
systew. In the past Olivetti-Undervood frequently got the 
bid. But recently they have quite conpetinq in the aanual 
market for it was not profitable. Host recently Olympia 
qot a bid for the sale of aanuals to the L.A. school 
* systea.» 

One of the factors that is qoinq to slow down the 
transition froa manual to electric typewriters in the L.A. 
school systea is the current budget crisis. For this year 
at least no aore electrics will be purchased. It will even 
be difficult to replace aanuals. Originally the school 
systea had a seven year replacement schedule. Recently 
this was raised to ten years and now with even greater 
budqet problems the replacement period will be longer. 

Even with these iapediaents to a changeover, 
eventually the switch will occur. When it does it will mean 
a great aany orders and the firas that prove themselves 
worthy in these trial periods will be the ones that qot the 
future bids. Host recently in the L.A. school systea a bid 
for 100 electrics aachines was distributed. It is still 
too early to state which coapany got the bid, but this 


231 



could be the beqinninq of a trend 



232 



FOOTHO TES TO CHAPTER Till 


1. Annual Report of Sperry Ran d Corporation. J967 , p. 

22 . 


2. Annual Report of Litton Industr ies . 1 965 , p. 11. 


3. Annual Rep ort of Oliv e tti-Unde rwood. 1 962 . 


4 . Annual Report of Royal-Mc Bee Corporation, 1960 , p. 8. 


5. Ibid ., 1964, p. 4. 


6. Ibid. 


7. Huch of the information provided in this section was 
obtained in a telephone interview with Mr. Bart Wigge, Head 
of the Business Education Department, Los Anqeles City 
School System on July 16,1969. 


233 



CHAPTER IX 


PDTUHE TRENDS IN THE TIPEWBITER INDUSTRI 

The typewriter industry has undergone some dramatic 
chanqes over the past years. It is the purpose of this 
chapter to exaaine these chanqes in light of their inpact 
upon the current and future status of this industry. 

A. Public Policy Guidelines as Rel ated to a Co hi pet it ive 
* Atnospher e 

Hecoqnizinq that the sales of nanuals as compared to 
electrics are on the decline, the path of the typewriter 
■anufacturcrs seems clear. Either they continue to lose 
their aarket position to IBH or they lower the "competitive 
barriers” in soae Banner and effectively coapete. The 
fandanental question raised is, what would be ideal fron a 
public standpoint if policy could influence the future 
direction of the domestic typewriter industry in the U.S.? 
Soae basic policy guidelines are suggested by Professor 
Bain in bis analysis of the comparative influences of 
seller concentration as coapared with barriers to entry as 
influences on aarket performance, lie concludes as follows: 

The aarket perforaance of the highly 
concentrated industry may be much better froa a 
social standpoint if it is not protected by very 
high barriers to entry. In consequence, policies 


234 



designed to reduce excessive barriers to entry 
■ay be considered as alternatives, as well as 
supplements, to a policy designed to reduce 
seller concentration. Hiqh concentration nay be 
a relatively innocuous phenomenon if entry 
barriers can be reduced to a moderate level. 1 

Pour such barriers to entry were outlined in Chapter III. 
They were economies of scale, absolute cost barriers, 
product differentiation and capital requirements. The 
policy implications of these barriers must be related to 
the fundamental characteristics of this industry. 

The Sperry Band Corporation appears to have achieved 
* a Remington standard office electric typewriter technically 
competitive with the IBM models. with only 2. 1 percent of 
the office electric typewriter, and with only 1.1 percent 
of the full-feature deluxe office typewriter market, 
Beminqton faces the overwhelming marketing and service 
organization strength of IBK. 

Thus the capital requirement is one of the biq 
barriers facinq Sperry Rand. To effectively increase its 
■arket share Sperry Rand would have to follow the footsteps 
of Olivetti in an outlay of $75 to $100 million to build a 
competitive marketing and distribution system. The only 
question is that, with such a large diversified 
organization, is the outlay of these funds in a $600 
■illion a year industry as effective as an equivalent 
outlay in the computer industry which has a much higher 
annual sales rate? 


*35 



The future consistency of the industry way be 
considerably different as far as Sperry Band is concerned. 
They way remain in the industry with the saae market share 
or if their market share decreases substantially they way 
pull out altogether deciding that the energy and money 
expended in this industry could be utilized to a better 
extent elsewhere. 

After the severe adjustments following the acquistion 
of Onderwood by Olivetti, Olivetti-Underwood appears to be 
effectively utilizing the marketing and service 
‘organization financed by Olivetti. Olivetti-Underwood 
possesses good electric models and has 10.4 percent of the 
office electric typewriter market, with 6.6 percent of the 
full feature deluxe electric office typewriter market. 

Olivetti-Underwood may be one firm that will make 
inroads into the future market share of the industry. They 
have already crossed the capital requirements barrier. 
With Olivetti's ties abroad they can probably obtain some 
advantages in terms of reduced production costs. However 
the main problem facing Olivetti-Underwood is to regain the 
lost confidence in their products. The firm has to the 
inertia that IBfl has developed in product acceptance. They 
have to demonstrate effectively that Olivetti-Underwood 
products are as convenient to operate and have as high a 
quality as the products of IBM. With product acceptance, 
price cospetition can go a long way in helping re-establish 


23 6 



Olivetti-Onderwood in this market. 

As yet SCtl has not wholly solved its typewriter 
aarket problem. A broad diversification and acquisition 
proqraa has provided the company with a growth momentum 
which will brinq total coapany sales to over $1 billion in 
a few years. This has lessened their dependence upon 
typewriter sales. But SCH appears to have given up its 
aspirations of competing with IBH in the office electric 
typewriter aarket with the dismantling of its direct sales 
organization, a prerequisite to supporting an effort in the 
‘office electric typewriter field, sen's position reoains 
stronq and growing in the portable typewriter field, where 
it does not face the competition of IBH and for which a 
specialized dealer channel of distribution is effective. 

As the demand for typewriters in the home 
especially the demand for electric portables — increases 
along with the increased prosperity of the country, SCH can 
look forward to increased sales and an increasing market 
share in the portable and electric field. SCH has already 
successfully differentiated its product by beinq the sole 
successful seller of portable electric typewriters. Bith 
such a dominant position in this area it certainly has 
economies of scale and undoubtedly is developing key cost 
advantages. The capital requirement barrier is not 
significant since a direct sales network is not needed. 
However if SCH re-enters the full feature office electric 


237 



field, it will have to spend a qreat deal of money due to 
the requirements of such a aote. However for the immediate 
future it appears that this is not the plan of SCH. 

Boyal has 11i2 percent of the office electric market 
and 7.3 percent of the full feature deluxe office electric 
aarket. However, increasing problems of aaintaining that 
share of the aarket confront Boyal. ” In office electric 
typewriter fully competitive with the IBB models has not 
been achieved by Boyal. It continues to be plaqued with a 
hiqh level of aaintinance costs and associated service 
calls necessitated by maintenance and repair problems. 
This problem combined with the declining share of aanual 
sales have helped reduced the overall market share of 
Boyal. 

The course of action that should be proposed for 
Boyal would be one that would seek to stea the continued 
erosion of the firm's market share in the standard office 
electric typewriter market. Its position has already 
declined with unfavorable impact on its direct sales and 
service organization. The main pressure, therefore, is to 
stem further erosion. If Royal loses a significant share 
of the office electric market along with a loss in the 
aanual market — which is decreasing for everyone — the 
coapany would literally be out of the industry. The 
industry would then be further concentrated and the 
doainance of IBB increased. 


238 



To atteapt at this stage to develop an office 
electric typewriter technically competitive with IDS would 
pash Royal still farther behind in the business competitive 
race — a setback which could iapair the competitive 
capabilities in the future. A tine lag of several years 
would be required to develop a technically efficient 
electric typewriter product. An additional tine lag of a 
aoaber of years would be required to regain narket 

acceptance lost due to the difficulties of the present 
electric typewriter manufactured and sold by Royal. In 
’ addition, the outlays would be substantial with the payback 
extended over such a lonq number of years as to represent a 
highly uncertain and unattractive return on the investment 
cowwitted. 

The solution that would, at least for the present, 
hold Royal's narket share and in the near future help 
increase it — thus helpinq the competitive atmosphere of 
the industry — would be a merqer with some company that 
has a technically competent office electric typewriter. 
Since antitrust emphasis seems directed against seller 
concentration, it seems unlikely that a merqer with a 
domestic producer would be feasible. This leaves the field 
open to a foreiqn manufacturer which by definition is 
limited to its maximum market share of 2.5 percent due to 
the marketing and distribution prohleas discussed earlier. 

By joining Royal with a foreign company which 


239 



manufacturers an office electric typewriter technically 
coapetitive with IBS, another entry into the typewriter 
industry with prospects of effectively competing with IBS 
would be achieved. The aarkatinq organization of Boyal, 
while still Maintaining some effectiveness, could be 
utilized by the foreiqn manufacturer. 

It should be re-emphasized that this does not 
represent an automatic addinq of market shares. There is a 
tiae lag involved before the proqraa would really get under 
way. First, tiae would be required for restyling and 
’ redesigning as the Royal typewriter. Sales and service 
staff would have to be augmented and trained to handle the 
new product. In addition, tiae would be required to 
achieve a sales momentum. Thus, sonethinq on the order of 
three years would be required to have a competitive product 
in a business sense ready, hopefully to nake sone aarket 
iapact. 

& second advantage to this course of action would be 
the possibility of Royal's entry into the Western European 
aarket with its nanual typewriter line. Royal possesses no 
effective narketinq organization for its annual typewriters 
in Western Europe. The inroads of the electric on the 
annual typewriter have not proceeded to the same degree in 
Western Europe as they have in the U.S. Thus, the aarket 
potential remaining for manual typewriters in Western 
Europe provides an attractive aarket for an effective entry 



by Boyal and therefore lore complete utilization of its 
O.S. nanufacturinq plants for the production of nanual 
typewriters. This would also be another positive step in 
helpinq the balance of payments which has been partially 
impaired by the tremendous inroads Bade by foreiqn 
■anufacturers of typewriters since 1957. 

Another distinct advantaqe of a successful product 
■erqer would be the assistance in a reduction of IBM's 
predominance in the office electric typewriter market, or 
the avoidance of further increase in IBM's dominant 
position. In some cases where a merqer enables a new fira 
to challenge the larqest firms more effectively, there may 
be competitive in-jury to the smaller firm. However, there 
are only four other firms manufacturing typewriters in the 
U.S. If IBM's dominant position can be reduced or if its 
increasing dominance can be retarded by reducinq the speed 
of the erosion of the aarket position of one of the other 
four firns, the relative d isa d vant age of the other three 
firas in relation to IBM is reduced. A reduction in the 
relative advantaqe of a firm which possesses approximately 
80 percent of the deluxe electric typewriter aarket, offers 
a substantial potential for a revitalization of entry in 
terns of the ability to compete effectively with IBM. 

Another aspect of the problems at Boyal is in terns 
of product differentiation. Professor Bain, in his study 
of the typewriter industry as of the late 19U0's and early 



1S50*s, saw product differentiation as an important entry 
barrier. He observed: 

The primary basis of differentiation seems 
to lie in product reputations and particularly in 
customer service (involving repair, aaintenance, 
inspection, etc.) built around established chains 
of dealers. * 

Hhat was true at the tine of this earlier study of 
the typewriter industry has becoae of increasing importance 
in connection with IBM's position in the market today. In 
the areas of technical product performance, relatively low 
Maintenance costs, low service costs, outstanding 
reputation of product, strength of marketing organization, 
strength of service organization, strength of related 
product lines with which the typewriter lines are sold, the 
position of IBM is clearly dominant. 

The proposed course of action would provide Hoyal and 
Litton with the possibliity of maintaining its market share 
against further inroads from IBM. In addition, it would 
increase the possibility of -Justifying further investment 
outlays in efforts to confront the overwhelming market 
position of IBM and to make investments seeking to develop 
a marketing and service organization supported by 
technically competitive products . 

The present dominant position of IBM represents a set 
of business and economic characteristics constituting a 


2b 2 



virtual barrier to the entry of any new fira. The 
strenqtheninq of any one fira thereby reducinq the trend of 
increasinq doainar.ee of IBS, would mitiqate to some degree 
the foraidable existinq entry barriers. Any hope for 
achievinq an effective new entrant at the present and 
increasinq the possibility of effective new entrants in the 
future aust lie in the near-tern achievements by the four 
typewriter manufacturers in first developinq an office 
electric typewriter technically competitive with IBS and 
then utilizing their remaininq strenqth in their marketing 
orqanization before deterioration proceeds further. 

B. tong Tera Pr ospec ts for the Typewriter Industry 

The typewriter industry is one that is rapidly 
chanqinq today and will incure even more dramatic chanqes 
in the distant future. Technoloqical chanqes are such that 
within 10 to 15 years the typewriter industry as is known 
today aay no lonqer exist. The structure of the industry 
aay or aay not be similar dependinq upon whether existinq 
firas and potential entrants can progress as rapidly as the 
industry leaders. 

Already what was once thouqht to be an indispensable 
part of the typewriter's function is rapidly disappearing. 
An inportant aspect of the typewriter is the ability to 


2*3 




produce clear carbon copies. A qre.t deal of time, effort 
and noney is expended in performing this task, Mistakes 
are difficult to correct and the carbon copies are messy to 
handle. How the ability to reproduce oriqinal copy through 
a photo process — at reasonable cost — has helped to 
eliminate this task. Besides the electronic data 
processing field, the copying/duplicating area is one of 
the larqest growing. 

Firms such as Xerox, 3n, Royal and SCH have entered 
the photocopy industry. Only two of the traditional 
typewriter manufacturers have entered this field — Royal 
with its Royfax and Yivicopy lines and SCH with its single 
stage dry process machines, the Coronastat 33, 44, 66 and 
88.* But note that two other firms not previously mentioned 
are active in an area that substitutes for one of the 
functions of the typewriter. 

1BR has gone a step further with the' IBB flT/ST. This 
machine has one unit consisting of a typewriter and another 
consisting of a disk tape. Typed material is automatically 
recorded. Errors are easily corrected with no erasing and 
as many oriqinal copies as desired are momentarily 
available. This machine has one advantage over the 
photo-copying machines and that is that it can reproduce 
many copies which are as good as the original whereas the 
photo-copyinq machines reporduce copies of a somewhat 
poorer quality. 



What is important to note with respect to this area 
is that presently there is not one larqe office, or school, 
or library that doesn't have several photo-copyinq machines 
and or an IBH HT/ST. 

Eventually however, the typewriter as it is now known 
will no lonqer exist, when the electronic era is reached 
soae other device will be substituted to- carry out the 
duties previously performed by the typewriter. What device 
will be used is unknown today, but this new era may not be 
far off.Already numerous corporate research departments are 
experimentinq with different devices. In 1961, it was 
reported that RCA had developed a device that would receive 
direct dictation and produce printed copies.* 

As with the electric era, a qreat deal of expense and 
time will be expended in developinq and aarketinq such a 
product. It is important to emphasize that the firms that 
will have siqnificant market shares in this era will be 
those that (1) develop the needed technoloqies soon enouqh 
and (2) develop a stronq earketinq and distribution system. 

Whether the industry composition will reirain as it is 
known today with Reninqton, Royal, Underwood, SCfl and IBH 
is quite debatable. With such a larqe expenditure required 
in terns of technoloqical development and in terms of a 
marketinq and distribution system, it is possible that IBH 
nay be 100 percent of this new industry if the traditional 
typewriter companies do not proqress in this area soon. Or 



perhaps qiants such as IBB, Xerox and HCA will dominate the 
industry. 

It is eainently apparent that the typewriter industry 
is proqressinq throuqh three distinct staqes. The 
pre-electric era is truly of the past. The electric era is 
upon us and will be prominent for the next several years. 
And then the electronic era will emerge openinq new vistas. 
Hhat lies ahead is truly open to present day nan's 
iuaqination and tonorrow's nan's ingenuity. 


2 k6 



FOOTNOTES TO CHAPTER II 


1. Joe S. Bain, Barriers to New Co mpetition (Caabridqe 
Hass.: Harvard University Press, 1956) p. 218. 


2. _Ibid., p. 285. 


3. "Shifts Hay Inprove Typewriter Results", Financial 
World. (January 11, 1961) p. 13 and SCfl, Annual Report, 

19667 1958. 


4. John Sine, "Typewriters", Adm ini strative Hanaaenent, 
(Hay 1961) p. 73. 


2k? 





chapter x 


SUBHART AND CONCLUSIONS 


Nearly 100 years have transpired since the invention 

of the first practical typing machine in 1873. Curinq that 

time span one may observe that three distinct tine patterns 

have occurred or are in the process of occurrinq. The 

three periods are the pre-electric era, the electric era, 

and the electronic era. 

« 

The pre-electric era saw the development of the 
■anual typewriter which resulted in four firms beinq the 
dcfinant producers. Curinq the early 19CC's cne could buy 
from rouqhly 150 different manufacturers.From an industry 
of over 100 firms, there euerqed feur dominant 
Manufacturers — Beminqton, l.C. Smith, Royal and 
Onderwccd. They accounted for 80 percent of the market 
share durinq the 1930's. The shift in popularity from one 
manufacturer to another was dependent upon new styles or 
new improvements in the machine. Up to and includinq the 
1920's, Underwood was a favorite. However, due to 
Underwood's technical stagnation Royal became more popular, 
and by 1938, Royal had fully established itself as a 
selling favorite. 

The consolidation in the typewriter industry was 
composed of two parts. Hany of the typewriter firms that 



bad been formed during the 19CO-1910 period had disappeared 
by the end of Horld Bar I. Then in the 1920's a Berger 
movement occurred which helped round out the product line 
of certain firms. L.C. Snitb and Corona Typewriter 
Coapanies merged, Remington Typewriter Company and Rand 
merged, as did Underwood and Ellict-Fisher. 

Chapter III attempted to analyze the market structure 

of the typewriter industry and to relate this structure to 

possible forms of market performance. Two hypothesizes 

were therein developed and tested. The first was the 
» 

hypothesis that the typewriter industry conformed to the 
definitions of oligopoly set forth by economic theory, that 
it was a highly concentrated industry and that this would 
lead to express or tacit collusion resulting in excess 
profits. Two tests were used to determine the degree of 
seller concentration within the industry. The first 
measured the amount of total market value accounted for by 
the tOF four and tcp eight firms. It was found that from 
1935 to the present the top eight firms accounted for over 
90 percent of the market value and the top fcur over 70 
percent. Bith a concentrated industry being defined as one 
with 70 percent or more of the industry cutput being 
accounted for by the top four firms, the typewriter 
industry definitely fits the classification of a 
concentrated industry, when examining the market shares of 
individual companies over time it was found that four firms 



each accounted for 20 percent of the market up to the early 
1950*s, at which time IE3 and the electric typewriter 
becaae prominent. it the present time the industry has 
shifted from an oliqopoly to one of partial EcnoFoly with 
IBB as the doainant firm. 

Shen the hypothesis of seller ccncentration was 

related to excess profits it was not substantiated. The 

industry is hiqhly concentrated but the industry itself has 

net experienced larqe profits. Some cf the firms have had 

substantial losses throuqhout the years. Only durinq the 
« 

tine periods of 1936-1940 and 1947-1951 did the averaqe 
Frcfit rate on equity exceed 15 percent. From 1952 on, the 
rate of return on equity never exceeded 8.2 percent. 

Economic theory suqqests that if seller ccncentration 
exists within an industry, barriers to entry may also 
exist.- Thus, a second hypothesis was developed to test the 
relaticnship between seller concentration and barriers to 
entry in the typewriter industry. Four barriers were 
considered — economies of scale, absolute ccst barriers, 
Frcduct differentiation and capital requirements. It was 
found that economies of scale existed in the pre-electric 
era and in the electric era. Absolute cost advantaqes were 
net siqnificant in the pre-electric era but with the 
development of the electric typewriter they have become 
quite important. Froduct differentiation has teen a stronq 
barrier to entry in both time periods. Up tc 1960 thero 


250 



was no available information on the capital requirements 
barrier. However, usinq Olivetti's purchase of Underwood 
as a possible aodel of capital requirements it has been 
estiaated that to enter this industry with a stronq 
aarketinq and distribution system an investment of $50 to 
$1C0 aillion is required. 

Thus, one can conclude that: (1) the typewriter 
industry has teen transformed from a structure of oliqopoly 
to a structure of partial monopoly with IBH as the dominant 
fire, and (2) the industry is hiqbly concentrated, with a 
hiqh deqree of barriers to entry, but with no apparent 
persistence of hiqh profits, except possibly for IEK in the 
post-war period. 

The product and distribution patterns in the 
typewriter industry have been exaained in Chapter IV. The 
industry can be divided into two major seqments -- portable 
and office typewriters. Each of these can be further 
divided into the aanual and electric markets. The portable 
typewriter requires an emphasis on low cost production for 
distribution throuqh aass retailinq organizations such as 
discount stores, sail-order houses, department stores, and 
specialty appliance and jewelry shops. 

The aanual office typewriter represents a declininq 
seqaent of the total office typewriter market. A 
considerable deqree of pressure has been placed upon the 
pricinq scheme of the office aanual typewriter by the 


251 



competition cf the full office electric typewriter and the 
compact electric typewriter. With the observed sequent of 
the total manual market declining as it is, one single 
manufacturer of office manual typewriters would no longer 
fce able to support a direct sales organization. 

Experience demonstrates that effective marketing and 
servicing of the office electric typewriter requires a 
direct sales and service organization. To support such an 
organization requires a hiqh density of volume on a 
national basis aided by closely related product lines in 
order to reduce the per unit marketing and service costs. 

Upon examination of the narketinq and distribution 
systen of the industry, IEH's head start during World War 
II has provided IBS with a position that is stronq and is 
qrowinq. Primarily IBH has an excellent machine and 
retains the only firm which has an effective operating 
selectric-type office electric. The naintenance expenses 
and required naintenance calls on the IBM office electric 
typewriters are low. IBB has developed a narketinq and 
service orqanizaticn for its typewriter product line which 
is larqer than the marketing and service organizations of 
all of the other typewriter firms, both domestic and 
forciqn, combined. Today the marketing and service 
organization, along with product acceptance, is a fora of 
product differentiation which represents a critical source 
of market power that a typewriter firm may possess. 


252 



Ihe advantages of a strong product, low maintenance 
costs, and extensive and effective marketing and service 
organization enable IBM to assign small areas to individual 
salesmen and servicemen so that intensive market coverage 
is achieved. & related advantage is that the density 
factor for IEH's aarketing and service costs results in a 
very low ratio of aarketing and service expenses to 
revenues. This provides IBM with another cost advantage 
which adds to the over-all entry barriers discussed in 
Chapter III. 

Bith high density IEM can easily reach all types of 
firns, both large and small alike. And with a related 
product line in the typewriter field, IBM salesmen can sell 
a family of products, thereby reducing marketing costs as a 
percentage of sales. In addition IEM can make high level 
contracts through its electronic data processing salesmen, 
which contributes to marketing acceptance of its products 
in a given organization. Thus, these related advantages of 
IBM represent formidable entry barriers to new competition 
in the electric typewriter field. 

For the foreign typewriter manufacturers, there are a 
number of elements to consider in any attempt to achieve a 
ma-Jcr penetration into the U.S. typewriter market. If the 
foreign manufacturer seeks to effectively penetrate the 
office typewriter field, it must have an electric office 
typewriter technically competitive with IBM. Possession of 


253 



a canual standard office typewriter will not achieve major 
penetration because of stronq competition with the four 
aajor O.S. typewriter manufacturers, plus the fact that the 
■anual seqment of the office typewriter field is a 
dwindlinq cne anyway (estimated to be 10 percent or less 
within a few years). 

To Basket the office electric typewriter, the most 

effective form of orqanizaticn for any larqe penetration is 

a direct sales force. Eut to achieve this requires 

national coveraqe. This is because the larqe purchasers, 
« 

the "national accounts," represent approximately one-half 
of the total office market. To provide the necessary 
marketinq and service support to obtain the profitable 
national accounts requires a national orqanization. But to 
establish a national orqanization necessitates substantial 
outlays of money. Bore importantly, until a hiqh volume of 
sales is achieved in each of the reqicns, the burden of a 
hiqh percentaqe of marketinq and service costs to sales 
price makes profitability itpossible. 

It is only in the low-price line seqment of the 
■anual portable typewriter field that foreiqn firms can 
penetrate. This cateqory of typewriters can be sold 
thcouqh the mass retail orqanizations of discount houses, 
■ail-order houses, department stores, and specialty stores 
to achieve a relatively hiqh volume. The requirement of a 
stronq service tack-up is not as qreat since it can be 


254 



provided by the specialty typevriter stores. 

These generalizations on the potentials of the 

foreiqn typevriter companies in the O.S. can be supported 

in a number of ways. The most direct evidence is found in 

the existinq lov market shares of foreiqn typevriter 

cccpanies in the office electric typevriter field. In 

addition, the inportance of the requirements of a larqe 

national direct sales organization is indicated by 

Olivetti's villinqness to make a larqe investment in 

Ondervood to obtain its U.S. sales organization. Further 
% 

evidence is provided by the larqe additional sums — over 
$100 million — that Olivetti vas required to invest in the 
effort to achieve an effective national, direct sales 
organization upon the base obtained frcz the Undervood 

acquisition. 

In addition to analyzinq the dominance of IBM in the 
domestic market one can also analyze the domestic market's 
declining sales trend abroad. Thus, Chapter V analyzed the 
impact of foreiqn competition — both its impact inside the 
O.S. and its impact on U.S. firms competitinq abroad. 

In terns of the O.S. domestic firms contribution to 
vorld trade, it is clearly evident that it has been 
substantially reduced. Prior to Vorld War II, U.S. firms 
accounted for 6S percent of the international narket, but 
in the last decade this has been reduced to 10 percent. 

In addition to the decrease in vorld trade in 


255 



typewriters, a larqe percentage of the O.S. firas hare 

■owed various production facilities overseas. A nuaoer of 

factors played an iaportant role in this decision. One was 

the iopact of foreiqn coapetition upon U.S. firas in the 

inexpensive portable field. The low production costs 

abroad provided consideratle hurdles for O.S. firas which 

resulted in a nuaber of then transferring production 

facilities overseas. Another factor was the rise in 

reqicnal econoaic trading blocks. To locate within these 

qrcuFS and avoid tariffs and other trade regulations would 
« 

be advantageous to these firas. 

It has already been established that fcreiqn firas 
cannot coapete effectively in the U.S. in the office 
electric typewriter field unless they spend larqe suas of 
aoney for national distribution and service organization. 
However, it is quite clear that the foreiqn ccrpetiticn is 
stronq enouqn to substantially reduce O.S. sales of 
typewriters abroad and to wake significant penetration of 
the O.S. portable typewriter aarket — both in terns of 
quantity of cachines sold and the quality of aachines 
produced. 

Following this analysis of foreiqn coapetition the 
study turned its attention to the developaent of the 
electric typewriter by inn, and the advantages that the 
electric has over the Manual. 

In 1933, IBH entered the typewriter industry by 


25* 



acquiring a firm called Electronatic Typewriters, Inc. 

Prior to World War II, the impact of the electric 

typewriter was not great.However, dorinq the war the 

picture was radically chanqed. Virtually all of the 

traditional typewriter coapanies were required by 

qovernaent order to suspend the manufacture of typewriters 

and turn their facilities to the production of war 

aaterials. IEfl, on the other hand, was successful in 

sellinq the concept that one IBK electric substituted for 

two nanual typewriters, thus saving both aaterials and 

« 

labor. 

Thus, World War II provided IBM with an opportunity 
to achieve product acceptance and a significant head start 
in perfecting the electric typewriter. Electric 
typewriters now account for 76 percent of the office 
typewriter market. A trend analysis indicates that this 
share of the electric typewriters will rise to 90 percent 
or aore of the office typewriter market during the next 
decade. 

With the increased volume of paperwork and the 
increased cost of office help durinq the early 1950's, the 
demand in the business world was for machines that 
increased productivity and reduced costs. The electric 
typewriter filled the need. With uniferm print, more 
uniform carbon copies, less fatique to the operator, and 
new features only available on an electric, the electric 


257 



typewriter went a long way in increasing office 
productivity and reducinq office costs. 

•The typewriter industry has had a lcnq history of 
merqer and consolidation activity. In its infancy the 
industry was comprised of 86 firms. At the turn of the 
century there was a merqer of several companies into the 
Onicn Typewriter Ccapany. This was basically a coabination 
of a promoter, a stronq sales qroup and a stronq 
■anufacturinq qroup. Hany of the merqers at this tiae were 
for the purpose of obtaining market control, but unlike the 
■erqers that created International Harvester or American 
Can or U.S. Steel — where a partial monopoly was 
eventually turned into an oligopoly — it can be seen that 
this merqer of typewriter companies attempted to enable a 
qrcup of firms to compete effectively aqainst other stronq 
organizations. However, discontent within the qroup 
quickly dissolved the organization. 

Eurinq the 1900-1910 period there were many entries 
into the industry since technology had net leveled eff as 
yet. Of the 86 firms producinq typewriters, 70 disappeared 
ty bankruptcy, either directly or after merqinq with other 
firms that in turn went into bankruptcy. Sixteen firms had 
some form of merqer activity at this time. Ten of those 
firms merged with existinq firms, and today only five of 
the oriqinal 86 remain. The merqinq activity of these 
firms was no .guarantee of either continued market 


258 



effectiveness or even survival. Hor did the Bergers 
undertaken durinq this tine period result in narket 
control. 

The qenezal merger movement of the 1920's essentially 
rounded out product and distribution lines. In part, the 
typewriter industry conformed to this pattern. The merger 
of L.C. Smith with Corona in 1926 was for the purpose of 
roundinq out the product line -- L.C. Smith with its 
standard typewriter and Corona with its portable. In 1924 
Beminqtcn purchased Noiseless for the purpose of roundinq 
out the product line. This was similar in nature to the 
Smith-Corona merqer. Then in 1927, Remington Typewriter 
Ccvpany merged with Rand to round out the distribution 
lines and perhaps qain some manufacturing economics with a 
full line of office equipment. The year 1927 also saw the 
■erqer of two firms heavily oriented in typewriter 
production — Underwood and Elliot-Fisher. This merqer may 
have been a reaction, in part, to the weakened position 
Underwccd found itself in after many of the above mentioned 
■erqers had taken place. 

It was not until after World War II that the electric 
ear initiated a drastic chanqe in the accepted pattern of 
industry structure. Prior to World War II — 1936-1940 — 
the profit rate in the industry averaqed 15.7 percent. 
This was due to the stronq position of the traditional 
typewriter companies in the market, combined with the 


259 



increased demand for typewriters in the business world. 
This was the peak of the manual era. Immediately after 
Borld Bar II the typewriter firms were able to recapture 
their position in the domestic and international sales of 
■anual typewriters. The profit rate cn equity averaqed 18 
percent durinq the 1947-1951 time period.However with the 
start of a new decade the profit picture in the industry 
rapidly deteriorated. 

It the end of World War II, IBB had a significant 
head start on the traditional typewriter manufacturers in 
the development of the electric typewriter. With the impact 
of foreiqn competition and the declininq share of the 
■anual aarket there beqan a new shift in the industry 
structure. The four traditional manufacturers were 
fiqhtinq for survival. IBB had the dominant position in 
the industry and a dominany position in the future. The 
industry had been transformed from an oligopoly to a 
partial nonopoly with IBB as the leader. Thus, a final 
■erqer pattern occurred — a wide effort for 
diversification into areas to provide strength in their 
typewriter lines was made by the traditional aanufacturers. 

In 1954, Royal merged with HcEee hoping belatedly to 
brcaden a sales and distribution base by enterinq the 
office equipment field. But with the impact of the 
electric boqinninq to be felt the profitability of the fira 
continued to decline, littcn's merger with Royal in 1965 


260 



Has really an attempt to rescue a flcunderinq firs. 

The 1955 merqer of Reainqton-Band and Sperry 
Corporation was very troad in scope. Its sain purpose was 
to combine Remington-Rands stronq manufacturing 
capabilities with the advanced technoloqy of Sperry. The 
actual typewriter aspect of the aerqer was relatively 
■incr. 

Saith-Corona was in serious financial trouble when it 

aerqed in 1956 with Kleinschaidt Labs and then in 1958 with 

Earchant to fora SCB. These aerqers provided a stronq 
« 

research capability (from Kleinschaidt) and rounded out the 
office equipment product line (from Harchant). 
Saith-Corona realized that from a merchandising standpoint, 
it was difficult to support a distribution organization 
with lust typewriters. 

By the time Olivetti aerqed with Underwood the latter 
was in serious financial difficulties. The purpose of the 
aerqer was to qive Olivetti an opportunity to utilize an 
already established domestic marketing and service 
organization. 

So this last merqer movement which in qeneral terms 
had as its motive the broadcninq of technological 
capabilities and the roundinq out of aanaqerial 
capabilities applied to some extent to the typewriter 
industry, but in a defensive way. The typewriter industr' 
simply would not have survived without the acquisition 


261 



that toot place during the 1950’s and early 1960*s. As it 
•as, the traditional typewriter industry in terns of 
independent companies has virtually disappeared. 

The activity of IBH is a special case. IBB acquired 
Electromatic Typewriters in 1933. This acquisition was not 
for the purpose of enterinq the typewriter industry but 
rather to aid in developinq IEH's keypunch machines. It 
was only throuqh strong urqinq by sose hiqh engineers in 
Electromatic Typewriters that kept IBB in the typewriter 
business. Then seeing the potential of the typewriter for 

t 

their data processing systems, IBB seized cn the market 
potential for the electric typewriter during Bcrld War II. 
This aave IEB the chance to achieve product acceptance for 
the electric typewriter and the time tc work out all of the 
technical difficulties — thus providing them with a 5 to 8 
year lead over all the other typewriter companies. 

Berqers have played no really important role in the 
typewriter industry in accounting for the present aarket 
structure. A possible exception miqht be IBB’s acquisition 
of Electromatic in 1933. At that time, the motive was not 
to become a stronq contender in the typewriter industry. 

In the typewriter industry, merqers appear to be an 
alternative to a firm simply qoing into bankruptcy, vith 
its assets beinq diffused throughout the industry 
generally. The firm acquired is typically not of much 
value tc the acquiring firm, but it is worth more to an 


262 



existinq fits than would be on the auction block. This is 
the «ain economic reason for these nerqers. 

Given IEB’s dominant position the last series of 
merqers nay be viewed as an attempt tc compensate for the 5 
to 10 year lead that IEM has in the development of the 
electric typewriter. Certainly the motives are not for 
market control, qiven IBM’s very stronq position. The 
motive for these nerqers is simply to survive in the face 
of IEM’s overwhelminq dominance. 

Prom the analysis of the oerqer patterns of the major 

* 

typewriter producers the study turns to an analysis of the 
educational market for typewriters. Today no one company 
has a dominant position in the sale of electric to school 
districts. It is apparent that this is a market with qrcat 
potential. Kith the increasinq numbers of school children 
and the switch over from manual to electrics, the need for 
electrics will be quite qreat in future years. Hhen the 
los Anqeles School System was examined it was found that 
only four classrooms were equipped with electrics (1.36 
percent). Of these, Olivetti-Underwood has 50 percent of 
the market. One reason for this is the fact that 
Clivetti-0nderwcod has been able to under bid other 
competitors. In the future, firms that want to enter this 
field must be able to compete upon a price basis, for many 
schcol systems use low price as a major criterion for 
buyinq from one or another company. 


2*3 



In reviewing the short tern future prospects for the 
typewriter industry it was found that each firm has a ma"jor 
hurdle to overcome before the dominance of I BH is 
sustained or even reduced. 

In the case of Clivetti-Underwood many of the 
problems are solved. They nanufacture a good electric 
machine. The one reuaining problem is to regain their lost 
product acceptance. Remington also has a gcod machine. 
But without a stronq marketing and distribution system it 
cannot effectively compete against IEK. 

t 

The problems at SCB are more serious. They possess a 
qood portable electric and are undoubtedly qoing to make 
continued market qains in this area. However, they have 
had serious problems with their office electric and have 
lest their position as a malor market contender by 
dismantling their marketing and distribution system. 

Royal's position is even more bleak. Hhile its 
market share in the office electric typewriter field is at 
present 10 percent, it is constantly being eroded. Royal 
has not developed an office electric typewriter technically 
competitive to IB K. Nor does the direct sales and service 
organization beqin to match that cf IB H. As IBH's 
doninance continues to be felt, the effect cr Royal could 
he a further weakening of its market position. 

When the electronic era arrives, technological 
ability and a good marketing and distribution system will 


264 



be the key requirements for success. If the traditional 
typewriter manufacturers do not develop these features, the 
industry composition as we know it today may be drastically 
altered. IBM may bold 100 percent cf the industry, or 
other firms, such as ECU or Xerox, nay be the industry 
leaders. 

Is mentioned in the introduction the primary purpose 

of this study was three-fold: (1) to update the picture of 

the typewriter industry to include both pre-electric and 

electric phases cf development, (2) to test the 
« 

relaticnships between seller concentration and excess 
Frcfit makinq in the electric typewriter field, and (3) to 
explore the problem of seller concentration and the 
possible existence of barriers to entry in the electric 
typewriter industry. 

With the above examination of the pre-electric, the 
electric and the future electronic eras, not cnly has the 
picture of the typewriter industry been updated but, in 
addition, a consolidated picture of the industry has been 
presented in one study. 


265 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 


BOCKS 

Bain, Joe. Barriers to Key Competition. (Cambridge; Harvard uni¬ 
versity Press, 1950). 

. Industrial Organization.(ifev York: John Wiley & Sons, 

- W%T. -- 

Bliven, Bruce, Jr. The Wonderful Writing Machine . (ifew York: 
Random House, 195*+) • 

Current, Richard. The Typeurlter . (Urbana: University of Illinois 
Press, 195*0. 

FOulke, Arthur. Mr. Typevriter . (Boston: Christopher Publishing 
* House, 1961). 

Hatch, Alden. Remington Arms - An American History . (New York: 
Rinehart & Co.,Inc., 1956 ). 

Herkimer County Historical Society. The Story of the Typc'/riter 
1873-1923 . (Herkimer: Herkimer Historical Society,* 1923 ). 

Mares, George. History of the Typevriter . (London: Gulbert T. 
Pitman, 1909)7 

Richards, Tilghnan. The History and Development of Typeuriters . 
(London: Her Majesty's Stationery Office, 1964). 

Weller, Charles. The Early History of the Typevriter . (La Porte: 
Chase and Shepherd Printers, 1910 ,'. 

Zellers, John. The Typevriter. (Hev York: lievcomen Society of 
England, 19**3). 


ARTICLES AND PERIODICALS 

*At Last a Completely Electrified Typevriter". Gas and Electric 
Keys, Vol. 1**, Ho. 10 (April 1927} pp. 333-391. 

Backhus, Fred F. "Thinking Little Pays Huge Dividends in IBM's 
Accuracy". Production (April 19o3) PP« 57-59* 

"Bene fitting from Electric Typevriter". Barron's, Vol. 35 
(December 5, 1955) FP- 37-33. 


2 66 



“Business Equipment Manufacturers Assn says Growth Face Outstrips 
United States". Electronic Ifeus, Vol. 11 (October 24, 1966) 

p. 1. 

Business Week (April 18, 1964) p. 58. 

“Can IBM Keep up the Pace?" Business Week (February 2, 1963) p. 92. 

"College Youth, $ 500,000 Target. Remington Typewriter Drive". 
Advertising Age, Vol. 52 (September 11, 1961) pp. 52 - 53 . 

"Ccme Back Situation Royal, SCM". Financial World, Vol. 119 
(June 5, 1963) p. 6. 

"Costly Merger SCM". Forbes, Vol. 82 (October 1, 1958) P* 25. 

"Dealer Looks at His Typewriter Business". Office Appliances, 

' Vol. 115 (April 1962) pp. 38-39. 

"Decline and Fall—Underwood". Forbes, Vol. 82 (August 1, 1958) 
pp. 24-25. 

"Dark Horse?" (SCM Corp) Forbes, Vol. 94 (December 15, 19o4)pp. 
34-35- 

Dubbs, E. "What the SCM Corporation May Mean to Shetland and 
Eroctor-Silex, Too". Merchandising Weekly, Vol. 99 (torch 

13, 1967) p. 32. 

Dykeman, John, Ed. "SCM Calculates Its Future". Modern Office 
Procedures (Hovenbcr 1968) pp. 44-46. 

■ "Electric—Pro and Con". American Business, Vol. 20 (April 1950 ) 

pp. 10-11. 

"Electric Hunt and Peck". Management Review, Vol. 39 (August 1950) 

p. 449. 

"Electric Wordwriter Simplifies and Speeds Typing". Electrical 
Engineering, Vol. 75 (January 1956) p. 93* 

"Electrified Pertable Typewriters". Product Engineer, Vol. 28 
(torch 1951) PP* 154-155. 

Engineer News (March l4, 1963) p. 197. 

"Expended Drive to Promote Kcv Royal Ultronic". Advertising Age, 
Vol. 37 (toy 23, 1966) p. 12. 


267 



Exports of Typewriters by the Ten Leading Supplying Countries, 1967 . 
(Washington D.C.: Office Machines International Institute, 

1968). 

"False Start". (Royal KcBee Corporation) Forbes, Vol. 89 (J-fey 1, 

1962) P- 28. 

Faltermayer, Edmund. "It's a Spryer Singer". Fortune (December 

1963) p. 1^5. 

"57 Export Statistics on United States Office t-fechines". Office 
Appliances, Vol. 107 (June 1958) p. 170. 

"line Italian Hand Ujgo Galassi, President of Underwood". Forbes, 
(July 16, 1962) pp. 22-23. 

> "First Light SCM". Foibes, Vol. 89 (May 1, 1962) pp. 27-28. 

Fortune, 1966 Plant and Product Directory of the 1,000 Largest 
U.S. Industrial Corporations, Vol. II SIC 3572 (1967). 

"Get Portable Business Back—Panel Discussion". Office Appliances, 
Vol 115 (April 1962) p. 39. 

"Good Management in Action". Forbes (October 15, 196l) p. 23. 

Grinmelman, D. W. "'typewriters: Why We Buy Electrics". Adminis¬ 
trative tenagement, Vol. 29 (February 1968) p. 22. 

"Guide Your Dealers to Better Profits". (Royal program for type¬ 
writer line) Sales Management, Vol. 85 (October 7. ISoO) pp. 

120 - 122 . 

Hoffman, Leslie. "Eliminating Secondary Operations". The Tool 
Engineer (August i960) pp. 35-37* 

"How Remington Sells to the World". Printer’s Ink, Vol. 276 
(July 7, 1961) p. W. 

"Haw the Rjrtable 'typewriter is Becoming a Portable Appliance". 
Merchandising Week, Vol. 97 (August 9, 1965) p. 30* 

"How to Organize Production Processes: Olivetti Applies Technique 
to Typewriter Building in Italy." American Machinery, Vol. 97 
(February ,16, 1953) pp. 133-7. 



"How Typewriters Opened Offices to Women". American Business, 

Vol. 20 (January 1950) p. 32. 

"IBM: Invest re Anpraisal of its ML Potential". Magazine of Wall 
Street, Vol/fil (February 14, 1943) pp. 541-543. 

"IBM Protects a Prestige Market? (ad program for Selectric) Printers 
Ink, Vol. 235 (October 4, 1963) pp. 54-55. 

"IBM Spreads into Automatic Typing". Business Week (July 4, 1964) 

p. 77 

■IBM's Selectric Typewriter". Office Appliances, Vol. 114 
(September I90I) p. 46. 

"Invasion of Olivetti into United States through Underwood". 

Business Week (October 10, 1959) P- 119* 

"Italy's Olivetti Sets Fast Pace". Modem Industry, Vol. 23 
(February 1952) p. 20. 

LaRue, Arthur. "Improving Reliability of Automatic Assembly 
Operations". The Tool Engineer (May i960) pp. 119-122. 

Machine Design, Vol. 23 (March 22, 1956) p. 8. 

"Manual vs. Electric". Management Review, Vol. 40 (July 1951) PP- 
402-403. 

"Managing Steel Precision Leedscrev gives IBM Composer High Print 
Quality". Materials Engineering (November 9» 1968) pp. 56-57* 

"Modernizing Fever Hits Typewriter Plants". Business Week (March 
18, 1961) pp. 126-123. 

Moody's Industrial Survey (ifcv York: Moody's Investors Service, 

Inc. 1914-19-09). 

"Mew Products Brighten Royal MeBee". Barron's, Vol. 44 (March 
23, 1964) P . 35. 

"Hew Products, P.ant3, Key to Smart Advance at SCM", Barron's, 

Vol. 44 (November 16, 1964) p. 22. 

"Mow Typewriter Uses Old Idea". Business Week (August 5> 196l) 

p. 48. 


269 



*1958 Export Statistics of United States Office Jfechines, Equipment 
and Supplier Table". Office Appliances (June 1959) P- 173. 


O'Connor, D. M. "When to Buy Electric Typewriters Office, Vol. 
65 (February 1967) p. 74. 

"Office Machines: Foreign vs. Domestic". Purchasing, Vol. 60 
(June 2, 1966) pp. 99-104. 

"Office Machine Industry, a Study in Confusion". Office Appliances, 
Vol. 116 (July 1, 1962) pp. 24-29. 

"Office Machinery Olivetti in Trouble". Economist, Vol. 210 
(March 28, 1964) p. 1283. 

"Olivetti, Crisis of Identity". Fortune, Vol. 76 (July 1967) 

pp. 93 +• 

I 

"Olivetti, Elegant and Tough". Fortune, Vol. 62 (September i960) 
pp. 137 +• 

"Olivetti, Low Prices, Low Profits". Economist, Vol. 220 (August 
27, 1966) pp. 849-850. 

"Olivetti's Return". Economist (February 25, 1957) p. 744. 

"Olympian Heights". Fortune, Vol. 58 (September 1958) p. 82. 

"Etching the Right Typewriter for the Job—Electric or Manual". 
Management Review, Vol. 46 (April 1957) p. 35- 

"Portable Gets Electric Touch". Business Y’eek (October 13, 1956) 

p. 74. 

"Portable Typewriters". Consumer Report (November i960). 

"Portable Typewriters". Consumer Report (November 1966). 

"Ihess a Button for a Cliche. IBM Electric Typewriting Hirose- 
vriting". Business Vfcek (October 29, 1955) p- 84. 

"Putting the Directors to Work - SCM". Business Week (November 1, 

"Rand Develops Hew Super Typewriter". Marine Engineer, Vol. 58 
(February 1953) p- 113. 


270 



"Eemingtan to Resume Portable typewriter Drive via Sullivan, 
Stauffer, Colwell t Bayler". Advertising Age, Vol. 34 
(September 9 , 1963 ) p. 1. 

"Remington Portable Carroaign Succeeds in Changing Foreign Buying 
Habit”. Printers ink, Vol. 260 (September 20, 1957)* 

"Remington Rand buys Comnuter Corporation". Business Week (March 
4, 1950) p. 20. 

"Royal McBee Ifeets Import Challenge". Factory, Vol. 119 (March 
1961 ) pp. 90-93. 

"Royal in $4 million Drive for Office Machines”. Advertising Age, 
Vol. 31 (March 21, i 960 ) p. 121. 

, "Royal Plugs into IBM's Ihrket." Sales Management, Vol. 90 
(February 15, 19°3) PP- 37-41. 

The Royal Standard, Vol. 8, Ho. 2 (February 1923). 

"SCM". Forbes, Vol. 100, Ho.10 (November 15, 1967 ) p. 23 . 

"SCM". Commercial and Financial Chronicle (April 27, 1961). 

"SCM Corporation". Commercial and Financial Chronicle, Vol. 196 
(December 6, 1962) p. 2337* 

"SCMVnkes Up". Sales Management, Vol. 90 (April 19, 1963) PP. 

44 - 1 * 5 . * 

"Shifts May Improve Typewriter Results". Financial World (January 
11 , 1961) p. 13. 

Sine, John, "typewriters*. Administrative Management (May 1961 ) 

p. 73. 

"Singer Aims to Sew Up Share of Market for Portable typewriters." 
Advertising Age, Vol. 33 (September 3, 1962) p. 12. 

"60 Electric - It's in the typewriter Dialer's Future." Office 
Appliances, Vol. 107 (January 1958) p. 24. 

"Special Abilities of Today's typewriters". Administrative Manage¬ 
ment, Vol. 26 (June 1965 ) pp. 64-63. 

"Sperry Rand - Marc of Over-ell Operating". Fortune, Vol. 6 l 
(March i 960 ) pp. 125 ♦. 


271 




Standard Educational Almanac, 

1968 ) p. 152 . 


(Los Angeles: Academic Media, Inc., 


“Switching to a Black Ribbon - Underwood Boosts Sales Since Olivetti 
Took Over". Business Veek (October 24, 1964) p. 178 . 

“Through History with Standards: Second Series". Magazine of 
Standards, Vol. 27 (March 1956) p. 77- 

“2 + 2 of Sperry Rand". Fortune, Vol. 52 (August 1955) PP* 88-91. 

"Typewriter Click—Electric Models Have Becone Key to Industry 
Recovery". Barron's, Vol. 4l (October lo, l96l) p. 11. 

“Typewriter Makes Shifts Key: SCM". Business Veek (torch 27, 1956) 

p. 172. 

'"Typewriter Tariff Argued in Washington Eearings". (Application of 
SCM and Royal) Office Appliances, Vol. Ill (May i 960 ) p. 8 . 

“Typewriters For Hone Use". Consumer Bulletin (toy 1968 ). 

"Typists lriend" (IBM Adm. Terminal System). Fortune, Vol. 71 
(February 1965) p. 204. 

"Uhderwpod and Olivetti, Fusion Makes Available Complete Line for 
Agents, Dealers". Office Appliances, Vol. 112 (August i 960 ) 

pp. 6-7. 

“Underwood Fights Its Way Back". Business Veek (December 30, 196l) 

pp. 42-44. 


"Unique Transfer-matic Mu chines Aluminum Frames for IBM's Hew 
Typewriter". Brochure published by Crocs Co . 

“U.S. Business tochine Exports-Imports Rise". International 
Commerce, Vol. 70 (January 27 , 1964) p. 31. 

Vough, C. F. "Competition and Rising Production Costs". Production 
(dccember 1961 ) pp. 6l-64. 

"What Vent Wrong at Underwood". Fortune, Vol. 62 (September i 960 ) 

p. l4l. 

United States Xmorts by Product, by Co-.ntry, for January through 
June, 1968 (new fori:: Business^ .equipment Manufacturers 
Association, September 12, 1968 ). 


272 



"Why typewriter Makers Want You to Sell Iheir Portables". 

Electrical Merchandising Week, Vol. 96 (August 10, 1964) 

"Wrong Keys — Royal”. Forbes, Vol. 86 (ifovehber 15, i960) pp. 

22-23. 


HBXJC DOCUEHTS 

Los Angeles Board of Education, Division of Secondary Education 
and Ffeasurement and Evaluation. Reports of Subjects and . 
Enrollments - Junior and Senior High School for Spring 
Semester 1906 . 1568. 

TJ.S. Department Commerce, Bureau of the Census. Annual Survey 
of Manufacturers, 1966 (Value of Shipments, Concentration 
* Ratios by Industry. 1967. 

_. Concentration Ratios in Manufacturing Industries . 1958. 

A report prepared for the Senate Subcommittee on Antitrust 
and Monopoly of the Committee on the Judiciary. 1962, 1963, 
1964. 

_. Current Industrial Reports, typewriters, July 1968 . 

(Series H35C (60)-7) September 9, 19o3. 

. Facts for Industry . (Series K35C) 1943-1967. 

_. Statist ical Abstr act of The limited States. 89th Edition. 

1968: 

_. Phited States Reports (Series FT-410). 1948-1967. 

_. United States Imports (Series FT-135) 1943-1967. 


U.S. Department of Commerce, Business and Defense Services 
Administration, industry Profiles, 1958-1965 . 1966. 

_. United States Typewriter Industry, Analysis end Trends 

1958-1966 . July 19o7. 

_. World Trade in Typewriters, ipltB-1958 . June 1959. 

U.S. Department of Health, Education, Welfare, Office of Education. 
Education Directory 1967-68. Fart 2, Public School System, 

—gjj- ‘ - 


273 




Halted States Tariff Comission. iyp g w~ii e ^s- Application for 
Escape-Clause Investigation Under Section 7 of the Trade 
Agreements Extension Act of 1951, as Amended. Brief on 
behalf of Snith-Corona-Msrchant, Inc., and Royal-McBee 
Corporation. November 1959 . 

U.S. Federal Trade Commission. Business 1-fa chine and Typewriter 
Ifenufaeturlng Companies. 19 S 1 T 


REPCRTS 

Craffey J. J., ed. IBM Selectric . Special Report to ET Employees . 
(Hew York: IBM Corporation, July 31 , 1963.). * 

International Business Machines Corporation. Annual Reports. 

‘ 1960 - 1967 . 

Olivetti-Underwood Corporation. Annual Reports . 1959 - 1962 . 

Royal McBee Corporation. Annual Reports . 1960 - 1965 . 

SCM Corporation. Annual Reports . I 96 O-I 967 . 

Sperry Rand Corporation. Amrial Reports . 1960 - 1967 . 

Litton Industries. Annual Reports. 1965 - 1967 - 
Consumer Bulletin (Annual 1968 ) p. 52. 


OTHER SOURCES 

Los Angeles Board of Education. Telephone Interview with the head 
of the Business Education Department. July l 6 , 1969 . 

Royal Typewriter, Division of Litton Industries. Letters received 
from Vayne Boulton, Product Analyst. July 29 , 1969 . 

Weston, J. Fred. Testimony submitted before the Federal Trade 
Commission in the merger application of Litton Industries 
and Triumph-Adler. April 10, 1569 . 



APPENDIX 



*?5 



9 Lz 


DATA TABLE III-l 


' PATTEHK OT TYPEWRITER SALES IN THE UNITED STATES, 1948-1967 • • 
(Figures in Mi. 1 Ilona of Dollars at Estimated Retail List Prices) 


Tear 

Ended 

12/31 

Industry 

Total 

Sales 

Port¬ 

able 

Sales 

f of Total 
Total Off. 
Sales Sales 

* of 

Total 

Sales 

Office 

Manual 

Sales 

i of off. 
Total Elec. 
Off. Sales 
Sales 

% of 
Total 
Off. 
Sales 

Special¬ 

ized 

typevr. 

Sales 

*of 

Total 

Sales 

1957 

546 (0 ) 

133 

24.4 

358 

65.6 

84 

23.4 

274 

76.5 

55 

10 . 0 (b) 

1966 

564 

126 

22.3 

368 

65.2 

101 

27.4 

267 

72.6 

70 

12.4 

1965 

430 

99 

23.0 

295 

68.6 

85 

28.8 

210 

71.2 

36 

8.4 

1964 

394 

98 

24.9 

265 

67.1 

83 

31.3 

182 

68.7 

31 

8 .0(b) 

1963 

352 

90 

25.6 

236 

67.0 

76 

32.2 

160 

67.8 

26 

7.4(b) 

1962 

352 

88 

25.0 

240 

68.2 

76 

31.7 

164 

68.3 

. 24 

6 .8(b) 

1961 

304 

84 

27.6 

201 

66.1 

74 

36.8 

127 

63.2 

19 

6.2 

i 960 

279 

70 

25.1 

189 

68.1 

73 

38.6 

116 

61.4 

19 

6.8 

1959 

278 

79 

28.4 

181 

65.1 

71 

39.2 

no 

60.8 

17 

6.1 

1959 

252 

81 

32.1 

160 

63.5 

71 

44.4 

89 

55.6 

11 

4.4 

1957 

289 

106 

36.7 

172 

59-5 

83 

48.3 

89 

51.7 

11 

3.8 



LLZ 


DATA TABLE III-l (continued) 


Tear 

Ended 

12/31 

Industry 

Total 

Sales 

Port¬ 

able 

Sales 

f of Total 
Total Off. 
Sales Sales 

* of 

Total 

Sales 

Office 

Manual 

Soles 

i> of 
Total 
Off. 
Sales 

Off. 

Elec. 

Sales 

iot 

Total 

Off. 

Sales 

Special/. 

Izvd 

typewr. 

Sales 

*of 

Total 

Sales 

1956 

256 

77 

30.1 

170 

66.4 

84 

49.4 

86 

50.6 

9 

3.5 

1955 

202 

59 

29.2 

136 

67*3 

75 

55.1 

61 

44.9 

7 

3.5 

1954 (a) 











1953 (») 











1952 

166 

*♦5 

27*1 

117 

70.5 

84 

71.8 

34 

'29.1 

4 

2.4 

1951 

166 

hi 

24*6 

121 

72.9 

90 

74.4 

31 

25.6 

4 

2.4 

1950 

144 

42 

29.2 

99 

68.8 

76 

76.8 

23 

23.2 

3 

1.9 0>) 

19^9 

100 

33 

32.9 

66 

65.9 

52 

78.8 

14 

21.2 

1 

1.2 (b) 

1948 

111 

32 

28.8 

78 

70.2 

67 

85.9 

U 

14.1 

1 

1.0 (b) 


(a) Data not collected In these years* 

(b) Estimated by summing components end substraeting from 100 percent 

(c) Sales defined ns U.S. Shipments less exports plus imports 

Source: Facts for Industry Series M35C, 1948-196?, Bureau of the Census, U.S. Dept of Coamerce. 



DATA TABLE III-2 


COST AND PRODUCTION CHARACTERISTICS OF TYPEWRITERS 
1958-1965 

SIC 3572 Typewriters 

Total Eaploynent Production* Workers 


Tear 

Number Payroll 

($ 1 , 000 ) 


Number 

Man Hours 
(1,000) 

Wages 

($1,000) 

1958 

19,779 84,467 


16,310 

29,748 

64,612 

1959 

19,692 93,593 


16,125 

31,320 

71,586 

I 960 

19,102 92,965 


15,266 

29,665 

68,064 

1961 

18,540 93,788 


14,848 

28,677 

68,096 

1962 

17,798 96,697 


14,049 

27,549 

69,308 

1963 

18,023 102,885 


13,940 

27,076 

71,068 

1964 

17,683 108,835 


13,401 

26,230 

71,350 

1965 

18,593 116,621 


13,992 

27,328 

74,246 

Tear 

Value Added * Value Shipments * Capital Expenditures * 

1958 

168,877 

238,173 


9,880 


1959 

188,658 

265,358 


7,395 


I 960 

201,186 

282,971 


10,307 


1961 

195,834 

270,535 


8,309 


1962 

206,883 

290,685 


10,073 


1963 

243,190 

315,385 


9,576 


1964 

288,151 

379,437 


9,083 


1965 

298,018 

395,599 


12,480 


* Amounts In $1,000 






2?8 



DATA TABLE III-2 (continued) 


Tear 

Value 

Added as 
Percent of 
Shipments 

Payroll 

per 

Employee 

Wages 

per 

Production 

Worker 

Value of 
Shipments 
per Produc¬ 
tion '..'errker 

Value 

Added per 

Production 

Worker 

1958 

70.9 

$4,271 

$3,961 

$14,603 

$10,354 

1959 

71.1 

4,753 

4,439 

16,456 

11,700 

i 960 

71.1 

4,867 

4,459 

18,536 

13,179 

1961 

72.4 

5,059 

4,586 

18,220 

13,189 

1962 

71.2 

% 433 

4,933 

20,691 

14,726 

1963 

77*1 

5,709 

5,098 

22,624 

17,445 

1964 

75.9 

6,155 

5,324 

28,314 

21,502 

1965 

75.3 

6,272 

5,306 

28,273 

21,299 



Value 
Added per 
Dollar of 
Wages 

Wages per 
Production 
Worker 
Man-hour 

Annual Man¬ 
hours per 
Production 
Worker 


1958 


$2.6l4 

$ 2,172 

1,824 


1959 


2,635 

2.286 

1,942 


i 960 


2.956 

2.294 

1,943 


1961 


2.876 

2.375 

1,931 


1962 


2.985 

2.516 

1,961 


1963 


3.422 

2.625 

1,942 


1964 


4.039 

2.720 

1,957 


1965 


4.014 

2.717 

1,953 


Source: Industry Profiles, 

1958-1965 (Washington: U.S. 

Government 


Printing Office, B.D.Sjt. 1966 ) p. 105 . 


279 



280 


DATA TABLE III-3 


SHAKE OP PRODUCTION DATA FOR INDUSTRIES IN SIC 357 CATEGORIC 
($ in millions) 


Computing Scales Office 

& Related Percent Type- and Machines Percent 

Total Machines of writers Percent Balances Percent Ncc. of 

Tear ghj-rocnts SIC 3571 • Total SIC 357? of Total • SIC 3576 • of Total • SIC 3579 Total 


1965 

4,310 

3,400 

78.9 

396 

1964 

3,359 

3,011 

78.0 

379 

1963 

2,732 

2,020 

72.6 

315 

1962 (a) 

2,202 

1,833 

83.2 

291 

1961 

2,373 

1,677 

70.7 

270 

i 960 

2,230 

1,556 

69.8 

283 

1959 

1,941 

1,302 

67.1 

265 

1953 

1,684 

1,104 

65.6 

238 


9.2 

115 

2.7 

399 

9.2 

9.8 

101 

2.6 

368 

9.5 

11.3 

98 

3.5 

349 

12.5 

13.2 

78 

3.5 

NA 


11.4 

75 

3.2 

351 

14.7 

12.7 

70 

3.1 

321 

14.4 

13.6 

81 

4.2 

293 

15 .I 

14.1 

78 

4.6 

264 

15.7 


(a) Total Shipmenta without Office Machines Nec. 

Source: Industry Profiles, 1953-1965 (Washington, D.C.. U.S. Government Department of Commerce, 
Business and Defense Services Administration, 1966) p. 105* 



DATA TABLE V-l 


0.S. PROPORTION OF TYPEWRITER IMPORTS 
TO EXPORTS 
191 * 8-1957 

(figures In percents) 


U.S. Percentage of Inports to Exports 


Tear 

Total less Parts 

Parts 

Total 

1967 

349 

4 

164 

1966 

296 

5 

176 

1965 

254 

4 

154 

1964 

219 

3 

137 

1963 

228 

8 

l4l 

1962 

399 

5 

125 

1961 

267 

6 

146 

I 960 

287 

1 

147 

1959 

283 

3 

138 

1958 

257 

5 

136 

1957 

130 

3 

78 

1956 

98 

3 

64 

1955 

58 

4 

41 

1954 

42 

3 

29 

1953 

33 

3 

25 

1952 

11 

7 

11 

1951 

10 

2 

9 

1950 

9 

1 

8 

1949 

10 

1 

10 

1948 

4 

.2 

4 


Source: These data were developed from the two foreign trade series 
published by the U.S. Department of Commerce. FT 135 Is for 
U.S. Imports. FT 140 Is for U.S. exports. (Washington DX.: 
U.S. Department of Commerce, Bureau of the Census) monthly 
publications 191*8 through December 1967 . 


281 



DATA TABLE VII-1 


REMINGTON RAND k SUCCESSOR COMPANIES 
Dollar Amounts In (OOO) 


Net Net 

Income Income to 


Tear 

Sale3 

Ibtal 

Assets 

Net 

Income 

Net 

Worth 

to 

Net Worth 

Average Net 
Worth 

1925 

N.A. 

31,230 

2,534 

28,730 

8.82 

.. 

26 

N.A. 

51,690 

4,558 

13,366 

34.10 

21.66 

27 

N.A. 

74,163 

5,967 

40,630 

14.69 

22.10 

28 

59,618 

73,128 

2,851 

41,056 

6.94 

6.98 

29 

63,292 

72,211 

2,928 

43,254 

6.77 

6.94 

1930 

64,l8l 

72,889 

6,o4l 

42,766 

14.13 

14.04 

31 

47,399 

66,429 

1,411 

39,364 

3.58 

3.44 

32' 

32,247 

61,003 

(3,036) 

28,637 

(IO.60) 

(8.93) 

33 

22,484 

45,509 

(7,581) 

22,453 

(U.50) 

(10.10) 

34 

27,913 

47,310 

1,265 

24,719 

5-12 

5.36 

35 

33,389 

48,710 

1,751 

26,400 

6.63 

6.85 

36 

39,358 

44,166 

3,010 

18,571 

16.21 

13.39 

37 

45,633 

44,264 

3,517 

17,565 

20.02 

19.46 

38 

51,104 

44,663 

4,510 

19,112 

26.60 

24.59 

39 

43,405 

43,240 

1,750 

18,770 

9-33 

9-24 

19^0 

44,031 

43,660 

2,305 

18,758 

12.29 

12.28 

41 

49,174 

47,435 

4,263 

20,708 

20.59 

21.55 

42 

77,283 

63,101 

6,195 

24,585 

25.20 

27.36 

*3 

91,600 

78,433 

4,319 

27,745 

15.56 

16.51 

44 

132,861 

79,504 

4,343 

29,360 

14.78 

15.21 

*5 

132,536 

75,419 

5,306 

23,674 

22.41 

20.01 

46 

107,985 

74,569 

6,541 

29,095 

22.48 

24.79 

47 

147,136 

110,455 

15,728 

42, 211 

37.26 

44.11 

48 

162,439 

127,981 

15,129 

42,924 

28.59 

35.54 

*9 

148,175 

126,081 

10,112 

58,177 

17.38 

20.00 

1950 

135,948 

130,846 

8,066 

61,997 

13.01 

13.42 

51 

187,486 

159,476 

14,037 

71,025 

19.46 

19.63 

52 

227,425 

201,435 

15,140 

81,927 

18.48 

19.80 


282 



DATA TABLE VII-1 (continued) 


Tear 

Sales 

Total 

Assets 

Net 

Income 

Set 

worth 

Net Net 

Income Income to 

to Average Net 

Net Worth Worth 

1953 

235,502 

205,701 

14,151 

92,362 

15.32 

16.24 

5* 

225,494 

207,712 

12,211 

99,078 

12.32 

12.76 

55 

258,389 

269,739 

16,127 

114,892 

14.04 

15.07 

56 

710,696 

557,493 

46,349 

254,473 

18.21 

25.10 

57 

871,047 

708,536 

49,612 

33=,848 

14.73 

14.35 

58 

864,330 

743,153 

27,481 

341,246 

8.05 

8.10 

59 

989,602 

778,475 

27,644 

345,807 

7.99 

8.05 

,1960 1,173,050 

849,215 

37,236 

3=0,057 

10.34 

10.55 

61 1,176,999 

895,217 

27,816 

370,789 

7.50 

7.61 

62 1,182,55^ 

873,006 

24,373 

345,091 

7.06 

6.81 

63 1,227,086 

901,160 

13,834 

348,724 

3.86 

3.99 

64 1,278,569 

888,740 

26,659 

336,644 

6.90 

7-25 

65 1,247,621 

915,417 

22,017 

383,609 

5.74 

5-72 

66 1,279,769 

948,698 

31,859 

415,633 

7.67 

7.97 

67 1,487,120 ] 

1,032,846 

53,902 

474,757 

11.35 

12.11 

(N.A.) data not i 

available 





Summary - 

• Grovth Rates 





(in Per Cent) 








Sum Net 







Income 







to 




Total 


Sum Net 


Tears Sales As: 

lets Income 

Worth Worth 

Notes 

1927-39 (2.8)* (4.4) 

(9-7) 

(6.2) 7.67 

*1928-39 

1940-55 12.5 12.9 

13.9 

12.8 18.36 


1956-67 6.9 5.8 

1.4 

5.8 8.68 


1927-55 5-6 4.9 

3.8 

3-9 15.01 


1927-67 8.6 6.8 

5.7 

6.3 10.24 





Sperry Corporation 


1939-54 21.0 16.2 

11.6 

14.5 19-66 


1932-54 22.0** 17.7 

29.0 

14.1 23.28 

**1937-54 




283 





DATA TABLE VII-2 


L. C. SMITH CORONA 
Dollar Amounts In (OOO) 


Net Net 

Income Income to 


Tear 

Sales 

Tbtal 

Assets 

Net 

Income 

Net 

Worth 

to 

Net Worth 

Average Net 
Worth 

1925 

N.A. 

N.A. 

N.A. 

N.A. 

N.A. 

— 

26 

N.A. 

N.A. 

N.A. 

N.A. 

N.A. 

— 

2T 

N.A. 

11,757 

772 

9,634 

8.01 

— 

28 

N.A. 

13,552 

756 

11,102 

6.81 

7.29 

. 29 

N.A. 

13,758 

1,169 

10,905 

10.72 

10.62 

1930 

N.A. 

13,066 

39 

10,006 

•39 

.37 

31 

N.A. 

11,366 

(927) 

8,944 

(10.36) 

(9.76) 

32 

N.A. 

9,928 

(1,031) 

8,010 

(12.87) 

(12.16) 

33 

N.A. 

9,786 

(292) 

7,792 

(3.75) 

(3-70) 

34 

N.A. 

9,928 

235 

7,874 

2.98 

3.00 

35 

8,306 

10,575 

428 

7,942 

5-39 

5.41 

36 

10,336 

8,477 

709 

5,772 

12.28 

10.42 

37 

13,089 

10,051 

1,096 

6,657 

16.46 

17.63 

38 

11,498 

10,058 

473 

5,733 

7.08 

7.67 

39 

11,^39 

9,876 

345 

5,786 

5-11 

5*99 

1940 

10,790 

9,961 

326 

5,799 

5.62 

5.63 

4l 

14,513 

11,471 

1,035 

7,431 

13.93 

15.77 

42 

18,452 

13,224 

1,327 

8,057 

16.47 

17.14 

43 

17,269 

13,913 

1,065 

8,492 

12.54 

12.87 

44 

18,901 

13,233 

717 

8,578 

8.36 

8.40 

45 

14,207 

12,329 

642 

8,581 

7.48 

7.48 

46 

14,085 

12,455 

868 

8,804 

9-86 

9-99 

47 

21,169 

16,188 

1,796 

9,955 

18.04 

19.15 

48 

25,444 

18,581 

1,737 

10,847 

16.01 

16.70 

49 

22,524 

18,331 

559 

10,922 

5-12 

5-14 

1950 

24,907 

20,787 

1,626 

12,307 

13.21 

14.00 

51 

30,995 

22,280 

1,806 

13,467 

13.41 

14.01 

52 

29,851 

24,621 

1,193 

14,016 

8.51 

8.65 


284 



DATA TABLE VII-2 (continued) 


L. C. SMITH CORONA 
Dollar Amounts in (000) 


Tear 

Sales 

Total Net 

Assets Incone 

Net Net 

Income Income to 

Net to Average Net 

Worth Net Worth Worth 

1953 

31,285 

24,624 

1,014 

14,385 

7.05 

7.14 

5* 

29,053 

24,987 

356 

14,434 

2.47 

2.47 

55 

30,988 

26,837 

1,052 

15,295 

6.88 

7.08 

56 

35,947 

29,759 

1,456 

16,507 

8.82 

8.53 

57 

56,820 

44,315 

2,154 

20,202 

10.66 

11.74 

58 

87,145 

76,676 

2,244 

34,567 

7.12 

8.19 

59 

90,411 

80,329 

551 

37,728 

1.46 

1.52 

i960 

93,358 

85,203 

(2,193) 

35,504 

(6.18) 

(5-99) 

61 

96,476 

86,345 

(1,843) 

33,841 

(5.45) 

(5.31) 

62 

103,165 

88,383 

2,592 

35,814 

7.24 

7.44 

63 

117,343 

88,430 

1,113 

48,043 

2.32 

2.65 

64 

124,704 

91,728 

2,437 

49,884 

4.89 

4.98 

65 

149,657 

96,931 

3,815 

52,948 

7.22 

7.42 

66 

240,560 

146,270 

10,658 

78,522 

13-57 

16.21 

67 

705,160 

451,402 

25,205 

177,401 

14.21 

19-70 


(N.A.) 

data not available 






Summary-Growth Rates 


• 




(in Per Cent) 








Sun Net 







Income 







to 




Total Net Net 

Sum Net 


Tears Sales A' 

isets Income Worth 

Worth 

Notes 

1927-39 N.A. (1.6) (7.1) (4.5) 

5.50 


19*»0-51 10.1 

7.6 16.8 8.0 

11.93 


1952-56 *.8 

4.9 5.1 4.2 

6.T9 


1957-67 29.0 26.0 28.0 2k.0 

7.73 


1927-56 7.2* 

3-3 2.2 1.9 

8.30 

*1935-56 

1927-67 11,9* 

9.5 9.1 7.6 

7.92 

*1935-56 


285 



DATA TABLE VII-3 
UNDEHWOOD 

Dollar Amounts in (000) 


Bet 

Income 


Tear 

Sales 

Total 

Assets 

Net 

Income 

Net 

Worth 

to 

Net Worth 

1925 

B.A. 

30,211 

2,889 

26,329 

10.97 

26 

N.A. 

31,440 

2,105 

26,481 

7.95 

27 

N.A. 

42,792 

3,974 

35,997 

11.04 

28 

N.A. 

38,157 

4,643 

35,921 

12.93 

29 

N.A. 

38,855 

7,363 

36,328 

20.27 

1930 

N.A. 

37,362 

4,012 

35,310 

11.36 

31 

N.A. 

33,502 

1,401 

32,416 

4.32 

32 

N.A. 

31,357 

(762) 

30,658 

(2.49) 

33 

14,648 

21,609 

1,518 

20,586 

7-37 

34 

20,716 

23,568 

2,605 

22,134 

11.77 

35 

23,975 

25,430 

3,096 

23,666 

13.08 

36' 

27,312 

28,216 

3,839 

25,839 

14.86 

37 

30,767 

30,053 

4,913 

26,954 

18.23 

38 

20,037 

29,405 

1,768 

26,183 

6.75 

39 

20,944 

26,121 

1,857 

22,963 

8.09 

1940 

23,020 

25,767 

2,226 

21,944 

9-23 

41 

32,659 

29,790 

3,740 

22, 372 

16.72 

42 

28,564 

34,652 

2,234 

24,343 

9.18 

43 

42,151 

38,293 

2,483 

25,298 

9.82 

44 

32,305 

34,713 

2,256 

23,802 

9.63 

45 

23,510 

29,564 

2,233 

23,826 

9-37 

46 

31,456 

31,629 

1,955 

23,945 

8.16 

47 

49,813 

38,332 

6,103 

28,089 

21.73 

48 

49,017 

41,637 

6,013 

31,265 

19.29 

49 

36,670 

39,956 

3,862 

32,456 

U .90 

1950 

50,855 

45,074 

4,927 

34,446 

14.30 

51 

66,559 

56,620 

4,970 

36,479 

13.63 

52 

57,363 

56,292 

3,730 

36,816 

10.13 


266 


Bet 

Income to 
Average Net 
Worth 


7.97 

12.72 
12.91 
20.38 
11.20 

4.14 

(2.42) 

5.92 

12.20 

13.52 

12.90 

18.61 

6.65 

7.56 
9.91 

16.88 

9.56 

10.00 

9.19 

9.38 

8.18 

23.46 

20.26 

12.12 

14.73 
14.01 
10.16 



DATA TABLE VII-3 (continued) 


ONDHWDOD 

Dollar Amounts in (000) 






Bet 

Bet 





Income 

Income to 



Total 

Net Net 

to 

Average Net 

Tear 

Sales 

Assets 

Income Worth 

Net Worth 

Worth 

1953 

65,898 

55,906 

845 36,796 

2.30 

2.30 

54 

63,367 

55,032 

1,238 39,634 

3.12 

3.24 

55 

69,272 

55,631 

1,501 39,459 

3.80 

3-80 

5© 

70,581 

59,142 

(8,138) 30,490 

(26.69) 

(23.27) 

57 

67,504 

57,024 

(1,613) 28,861 

(5-59) 

(5.44) 

58 

57,075 

63,390 

(7,U7) 27,459 

(25.91) 

(25.27) 

59 

60,494 

56,890 

(14,093) 13,150 

(77.65) 

( 61 . 26 ) 

i 960 

79,081 

72,761 

(26,033) 16,156 

(l6l.l4) 

(151.59) 

61 

82,255 

88,827 

( 8 , 926 ) 8,053 

(110.84) 

(73-74) 

62 

99,778 

95,790 

( 8 , 052 ) 47 

(a) 

( 198 . 81 ) 


(N.A.) 

data not 

available 



(a) 

not calculated 





Summary- Growth Rates 






(in Per Cent) 

Sum Net 






Income 






to 




total 

Net Net 

Sum Net 


Tears 

Sales 

Assets 

Income Worth 

Worth 

Notes 

1927-39 6 . 2 * 

(7.9) 

(11-9) ( 8 . 0 ) 

10.73 

*1933-39 

1940-55 7.6 

5.3 

( 2 . 6 ) 4.0 

10.46 


1956-62 6.0 

8.4 

( 0 . 2 ) ( 65 .O) 

(57.25) 


1927-55 7.3* 

0.9 

(3-5) 0.3 

10.58 

*1933-55 

1927-62 6 . 8 * 

2 ‘ 3 tow (100) < 17 - 2) 

1.68 

*1933-62 


287 



DATA TABLE VI1-4 


ROYAL & SUCCESSOR COMPANIES 
Dollar Amounts in (OOO) 


Total Net 


Year 

Sales 

Assets 

Income 

1925 

N.A. 

12,357 

1,020 

* 26 

N.A. 

12,821 

1,118 

27 

N.A. 

13,403 

1,130 

28 

N.A. 

14,043 

425 

29 

N.A. 

15,088 

562 

1930 

N.A. 

15,012 

333 

31 

N.A. 

14,037 

(42) 

32 

N.A. 

13,414 

(424) 

33 

N.A. 

13,866 

145 

34 

N.A. 

14,963 

942 

35 

N.A. 

10,512 

1,677 

36 

16,666 

10,818 

2,628 

37 

N.A. 

11,224 

1,573 

38 

15,712 

10,940 

1,526 

39 

18,173 

11,716 

1,654 

1940 

18,782 

12,637 

2,388 

41 

24,376 

15,216 

2,733 

kz 

22,224 

14,978 

2.475 

43 

13,304 

14,559 

326 

44 

18,759 

15,310 

1,657 

45 

22,556 

16,743 

1,468 

46 

19,242 

15,723 

590 

47 

35,620 

20,922 

4,013 

48 

49,708 

25,260 

5,620 

*►9 

42,554 

25,154 

3,693 

1950 

43,472 

27,349 

3,909 

51 

60,368 

33,295 

4,438 

52 

58,204 

32,675 

3,109 


Net 

Worth 

lfet 

Income 

to 

Net Worth 

Net 

Income to 
Average Net 
Worth 

10,6l8 

9.61 

— 

11,136 

10.04 

10.28 

11,480 

9.84 

9-99 

11,912 

3.57 

3.63 

12,451 

4.51 

4.61 

12,726 

2.62 

2.64 

12,610 

(-33) 

(.33) 

12,021 

(3.35) 

(3-44) 

12,085 

1.20 

1.20 

12,395 

7.60 

7.69 

8,819 

19.02 

15.81 

9,165 

28.67 

29.22 

9,657 

15.92 

16.71 

10,101 

15.01 

15.45 

10,665 

15.51 

15.93 

11,219 

21.29 

21.82 

12,207 

22.39 

11.67 

13,360 

18.53 

19.36 

13,195 

2.47 

2.45 

13,407 

7.88 

7.95 

14,182 

10.35 

10.64 

13,864 

4.26 

4.21 

15,116 

26.55 

27.69 

18,577 

30.25 

33.36 

20,089 

18.38 

18.79 

22,001 

17.77 

18.57 

23,797 

18.65 

19-38 

24,535 

12.67 

12.86 


28 B 



DATA TABLE VII-4 (continued) 


ROYAL & SUCCESSOR COMPANIES 
Dollar Asounts in (OOO) 


Tear 

Sales 

Total Net 

Assets Income 

Net 

Worth 

Set 

Income 

to 

Net Worth 

Net 

Income to 
Average Net 
Worth 

1953 

68,986 

33,563 

2,776 

25,151 

11.04 

11.17 

54 

84,398 

46,984 

2,791 

31,868 

8.76 

9.79 

55 

84,694 

53,051 

3,633 

33,545 

10.83 

11.11 

56 

95,876 

63,097 

5,665 

41,413 

13.68 

15.12 

57 

107,648 

67,792 

4,456 

43,381 

10.27 

10.51 

58 

94,872 

68,817 

387 

41,878 

0.92 

0.91 

59 

103,951 

85,599 

1,285 

43,274 

2.97 

3.02 

i960 

111,073 

84,743 

771 

43,710 

1.76 

1.77 

61 

106,846 

82,823 (1,080) 

1 43,199 

(2.50) 

(2.49) 

62 

106,335 

69,145 

1,781 

37,703 

4.72 

4.40 

63 

109,231 

64,705 

1,427 

38,445 

3.71 

3.75 

64 

113,650 

70,081 

1,898 

39,843 

4.76 

4.85 


(N.A.) data not available 





Summary- 

Grovth Rates 





(in Per Cent) 



Tears 

Sales 

Total 

Assets 

Net 

Income 

Net 

Worth 

Sum Net 
Income 
to 

Sum Net 

Worth 

1927-39 2-9 

(1.1) 

3.2 

(0.6) 

8.30 

1940-54 11.3 

9-8 


1.1 

7-7 

15.18 

1955-64 3.3 

3.1 


(7.0) 

1.9 

7.28 

1927-54 9-4 

4.8 


3.4 

3.9 

12.78 

1927-64 8.5 

4.6 


1.4 

3.4 

8.94 


289